options.txt For Vim version 6.4. Last change: 2014 Nov 05RG_SO_FILES, LINK

ARGS_SO,

VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar

Options optionsLINK

1. Setting options set-option

2. Automatically setting options auto-setting

3. Options summary option-summary

For an overview of options see help.txt option-list.

Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to

achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:

boolean can only be on or off boolean toggleLINK

number has a numeric value

string has a string value

==============================================================================

1. Setting options set-option E764LINK

:se :setLINK

:se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.

:se[t] all Show all but terminal options.

:se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the

key codes are not shown, because they are generated

internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal

codes in the GUI is not useful either...

E518 E519LINK

:se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.

:se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.

Number option: show value.

String option: show value.

:se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.

:set-! :set-invLINK

:se[t] {option}! or

:se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}

:set-default :set-& :set-&vi :set-&vimLINK

:se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the

current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}

:se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their

default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and

'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}

:set-args E487 E521LINK

:se[t] {option}={value} or

:se[t] {option}:{value}

Set string or number option to {value}.

For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,

hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0').

The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by

default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is

set). See cmdline-completion.

White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and

will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}

is not allowed.

See option-backslash for using white space and

backslashes in {value}.

:se[t] {option}+={value} :set+=LINK

Add the {value} to a number option, or append the

{value} to a string option. When the option is a

comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the

value was empty.

If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags

are removed. When adding a flag that was already

present the option value doesn't change.

Also see :set-args above.

{not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}^={value} :set^=LINK

Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend

the {value} to a string option. When the option is a

comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the

value was empty.

Also see :set-args above.

{not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}-={value} :set-=LINK

Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove

the {value} from a string option, if it is there.

If the {value} is not found in a string option, there

is no error or warning. When the option is a comma

separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option

becomes empty.

When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be

exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags

one by one to avoid problems.

Also see :set-args above.

{not in Vi}

The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example:

:set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3

If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given

and the following arguments will be ignored.

:set-verboseLINK

When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it

was last set. Example:

:verbose set shiftwidth cindent?

shiftwidth=4

Last set from modeline

cindent

Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim

This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose

set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument.

When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message.

When the option was set while executing a function, user command or

autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.

Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting

'compatible'.

A few special texts:

Last set from modeline

Option was set in a modeline.

Last set from --cmd argument

Option was set with command line argument --cmd or +.

Last set from -c argument

Option was set with command line argument -c, +, -S or

-q.

Last set from environment variable

Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT,

$GVIMINIT or $EXINIT.

Last set from error handler

Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error.

{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}

:set-termcap E522LINK

For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will

override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If

the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form:

:set <t_#4>=^[Ot

This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For

example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this:

:set <M-b>=^[b

(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)

The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.

You can define any key codes, e.g.:

:set t_xy=^[foo;

There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized. You can map these

codes as you like:

:map <t_xy> something

E846LINK

When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist. Trying to get its

value will result in an error:

:set t_kb=

:set t_kb

E846: Key code not set: t_kb

The t_xx options cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put

at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of

"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the

more-prompt.

option-backslashLINK

To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a

backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this

means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded

down).

A few examples:

:set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"

:set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"

:set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"

The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To

include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the

'titlestring' option to "hi|there":

:set titlestring=hi\|there

This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there":

:set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there

Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in

the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring'

option to 'hi "there"':

:set titlestring=hi\ \"there\"

For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More

precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment

variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not

removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,

etc.) is used like explained above.

There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\":

:set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"

:set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"

:set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)

For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes

are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be

halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a

result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.

add-option-flags remove-option-flagsLINK

E539 E550 E551 E552LINK

Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an

option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this:

:set guioptions+=a

Remove a flag from an option like this:

:set guioptions-=a

This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.

Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has

the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"

doesn't appear.

:set_env expand-env expand-environment-varLINK

Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the

environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable

name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name

are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may

follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is

appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples:

:set term=$TERM.new

:set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.

When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set

opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.

Handling of local options local-optionsLINK

Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer

has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This

allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set

'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.

The following explains what happens to these local options in specific

situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses

the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user

expects is a bit complicated...

When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus

right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.

When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since

the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,

these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a

global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and

global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,

thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.

When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window

options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the

values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where

the buffer was edited last are used.

It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.

When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep

using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the

local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window

has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but

global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do:

:e one

:set list

:e two

Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"

command you have also set the global value.

:set nolist

:e one

:setlocal list

:e two

Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global

value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the

global value. Note that if you do this next:

:e one

You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one".

The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer. This also

happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is

wiped out :bwipe.

:setl :setlocalLINK

:setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the

current buffer or window. Not all options have a

local value. If the option does not have a local

value the global value is set.

With the "all" argument: display local values for all

local options.

Without argument: Display local values for all local

options which are different from the default.

When displaying a specific local option, show the

local value. For a global/local boolean option, when

the global value is being used, "--" is displayed

before the option name.

For a global option the global value is

shown (but that might change in the future).

{not in Vi}

:setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by

copying the value.

{not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}< For global-local options: Remove the local value of

{option}, so that the global value will be used.

{not in Vi}

:setg :setglobalLINK

:setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local

option without changing the local value.

When displaying an option, the global value is shown.

With the "all" argument: display global values for all

local options.

Without argument: display global values for all local

options which are different from the default.

{not in Vi}

For buffer-local and window-local options:

Command global value local value

:set option=value set set

:setlocal option=value - set

:setglobal option=value set -

:set option? - display

:setlocal option? - display

:setglobal option? display -

Global options with a local value global-localLINK

Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.

For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.

You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then

use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global

value.

For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global

'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows:

:set makeprg=gmake

then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set

the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.

However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use

another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source

files. You use this command:

:setlocal makeprg=perlmake

You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty:

:setlocal makeprg=

This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the

"<" flag, like this:

:setlocal autoread<

Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the

local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters

when the global value changes later). You can also use:

:set path<

This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is

used. Thus it does the same as:

:setlocal path=

Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using

":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.

Setting the filetype

:setf[iletype] {filetype} :setf :setfiletypeLINK

Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if

not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.

This is short for:

:if !did_filetype()

: setlocal filetype={filetype}

:endif

This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid

setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different

settings and syntax files to be loaded.

{not in Vi}

option-window optwinLINK

:bro[wse] se[t] :set-browse :browse-set :opt :optionsLINK

:opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.

Options are grouped by function.

Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the

short help to open a help window with more help for

the option.

Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the

"set" line to set the new value. For window and

buffer specific options, the last accessed window is

used to set the option value in, unless this is a help

window, in which case the window below help window is

used (skipping the option-window).

{not available when compiled without the +eval or

+autocmd features}

$HOMELINK

Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an

option and after a space or comma.

On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory

of user "user". Example:

:set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.

On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can

contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the

"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.

On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then

at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.

NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"

command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".

Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on

the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.

:fix :fixdelLINK

:fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':

't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes

CTRL-? CTRL-H

not CTRL-? CTRL-?

(CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}

If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the

code for backspace is alright, you can put this in

your .vimrc:

:fixdel

This works no matter what the actual code for

backspace is.

If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can

use this:

:if &term == "termname"

: set t_kb=^V<BS>

: fixdel

:endif

Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key

(don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"

with your terminal name.

If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not

CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use:

:if &term == "termname"

: set t_kD=^V<Delete>

:endif

Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key

(don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"

with your terminal name.

Linux-backspaceLINK

Note about Linux: By default the backspace key

produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by

putting this line in your rc.local:

echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys

NetBSD-backspaceLINK

Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce

the right code, try this:

xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"

If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file:

keysym 22 = BackSpace

You need to restart for this to take effect.

==============================================================================

2. Automatically setting options auto-settingLINK

Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives

to set options automatically for one or more files:

1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See

initialization. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,

and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.

You can create an initialization file with :mkvimrc, :mkview and

:mksession.

2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.

This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and

many other things. See autocommand.

3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a

number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for

modelines. This is explained here.

modeline vim: vi: ex: E520LINK

There are two forms of modelines. The first form:

[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}

[text] any text or empty

{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)

{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"

[white] optional white space

{options} a list of option settings, separated with white space

or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument

for a ":set" command (can be empty)

Examples:

vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6

vim: tw=77

The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):

[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]

[text] any text or empty

{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)

{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:"

[white] optional white space

se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When

"Vim" is used it must be "set".

{options} a list of options, separated with white space, which

is the argument for a ":set" command

: a colon

[text] any text or empty

Examples:

/* vim: set ai tw=75: */

/* Vim: set ai tw=75: */

The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the

chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception:

"vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with

version 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this

could be short for "example:").

modeline-localLINK

The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the

buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global

options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and

the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result

depends on which one was opened last.

When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options

from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local

option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer

in another window. But window-local options will be set.

modeline-versionLINK

If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version

number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used:

vim{vers}: version {vers} or later

vim<{vers}: version before {vers}

vim={vers}: version {vers}

vim>{vers}: version after {vers}

{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).

For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later:

/* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */

To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7:

/* vim<570: set sw=4: */

There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".

The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.

If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.

Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line

like:

/* vi:ts=4: */

will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK:

/* vi:set ts=4: */

If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.

If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The

backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example:

/* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */

This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the

':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".

No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody

might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options

can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the

sandbox is effective. Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline

causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines

are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text.

The mail ftplugin does this, for example.

Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could

define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For

example:

au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif

And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing

"VAR".

==============================================================================

3. Options summary option-summaryLINK

In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with

an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.

In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"

is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.

For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is

used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when

'compatible' is set.

Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that

are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a

different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in

one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view

at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain

file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example

the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C

program.

global one option for all buffers and windows

local to window each window has its own copy of this option

local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option

When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window

are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the

buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the

'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for

buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is

first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer

is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not

present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the

buffer is created.

Hidden options hidden-optionsLINK

Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported

features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces

below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an

error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden

option though, it is not stored.

To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this:

if exists('&foo')

This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really

supported use something like this:

if exists('+foo')

E355LINK

A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at Q_op.

'aleph' 'al' aleph AlephLINK

'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The

routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode

(when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)

outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].

aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.

See rileft.txt.

'allowrevins' 'ari' 'noallowrevins' 'noari'LINK

'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to

avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get

into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See

'revins'.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'altkeymap' 'akm' 'noaltkeymap' 'noakm'LINK

'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +farsi

feature}

When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles

the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.

When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This

is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right

mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left

mode). See farsi.txt.

'ambiwidth' 'ambw'LINK

'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.

Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class

Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek

letters, Cyrillic letters).

There are currently two possible values:

"single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is

expected by most users.

"double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.

E834 E835LINK

The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'

contains a character that would be double width.

There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for

those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in

legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,

Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,

therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also

true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text

file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or

Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font

(or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),

this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived

by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has

to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP

when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode

Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).

Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is

compiled with the +termresponse feature and if t_u7 is set to the

escape sequence to request cursor position report.

'antialias' 'anti' 'noantialias' 'noanti'LINK

'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled

on Mac OS X}

This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X

v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,

which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.

Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set

to its default (empty string).

'autochdir' 'acd' 'noautochdir' 'noacd'LINK

'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with it, use

exists("+autochdir") to check}

When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you

open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.

It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened

or selected.

This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim

released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition.

Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.

'arabic' 'arab' 'noarabic' 'noarab'LINK

'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +arabic

feature}

This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.

Setting this option will:

- Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.

- Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.

- Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles

between typing English and Arabic key mapping.

- Set the 'delcombine' option

Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.

Resetting this option will:

- Reset the 'rightleft' option.

- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).

Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global

option).

Also see arabic.txt.

'arabicshape' 'arshape'LINK

'noarabicshape' 'noarshape'LINK

'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +arabic

feature}

When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character

corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language

take effect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad

one which encompasses:

a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location

within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).

b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters

c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters

When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone

form.

Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for

further details see arabic.txt.

'autoindent' 'ai' 'noautoindent' 'noai'LINK

'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>

in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not

type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type

<Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor

to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included

in 'cpoptions'.

When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you

reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first

line.

When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in

a different way.

The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.

{small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing

<Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the

deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.

'autoread' 'ar' 'noautoread' 'noar'LINK

'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and

it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.

When the file has been deleted this is not done. timestamp

If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to

using the global value:

:set autoread<

'autowrite' 'aw' 'noautowrite' 'noaw'LINK

'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)

global

Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each

:next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,

:make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I,

'{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.

Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see

'autowriteall' for that.

'autowriteall' 'awa' 'noautowriteall' 'noawa'LINK

'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",

":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.

Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has

been set.

'background' 'bg'LINK

'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light", see below)

global

{not in Vi}

When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a

dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that

look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.

Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.

This will not always be correct.

Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim

what the background color looks like. For changing the background

color, see :hi-normal.

When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for

the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not

change. g:colors_nameLINK

When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)

setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If

the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.

However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may

be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.

When setting 'background' to the default value with:

:set background&

Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,

in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.

When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be

"light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects

that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to

"dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read

(because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background

color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by

putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value

of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").

For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark".

For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux",

"screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark

background. Otherwise the default is "light".

Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly

depending on the terminal name. Example:

:if &term == "pcterm"

: set background=dark

:endif

When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups

will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER

the setting of the 'background' option.

This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file

to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this

option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be

done with ":syntax on".

'backspace' 'bs'LINK

'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert

mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows

a way to backspace over something:

value effect

indent allow backspacing over autoindent

eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)

start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U

stop once at the start of insert.

When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.

For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:

value effect

0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)

1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"

2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"

See :fixdel if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.

NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.

'backup' 'bk' 'nobackup' 'nobk'LINK

'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the

file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the

backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being

written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is

the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both

options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the

backup-table for more explanations.

When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.

When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the

oldest version of a file.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'backupcopy' 'bkc'LINK

'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's

done. This is a comma separated list of words.

The main values are:

"yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one

"no" rename the file and write a new one

"auto" one of the previous, what works best

Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:

"breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing

"breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing

Making a copy and overwriting the original file:

- Takes extra time to copy the file.

+ When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or

has a resource fork, all this is preserved.

- When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,

not of the real file.

Renaming the file and writing a new one:

+ It's fast.

- Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new

file.

- When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.

The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file

is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and

the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a

copy will be made.

The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in

combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they

force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing

exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to

become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be

useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or

hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not

be propagated back to the original source.

crontabLINK

One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program

that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if

the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the

backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an

example.

When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled

with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and

symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file

however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The

group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this

fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for

others.

When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has

the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file

is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)

link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't

rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly

written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but

the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will

again not rename the file.

'backupdir' 'bdir'LINK

'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",

for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:/tmp,c:/temp"

for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")

global

{not in Vi}

List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.

- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list

where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not

create it for you.

- Empty means that no backup file will be created ( 'patchmode' is

impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.

- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory

as the edited file.

- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to

put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The

leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.

("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).

- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part

of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory

name, precede it with a backslash.

- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.

- A directory name may end in an '/'.

- Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to

get one in the option (see option-backslash), for example:

:set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces

- For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start

of the option is removed.

See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.

If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value:

:set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp

You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your

home directory for this to work properly.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'backupext' 'bex' E589LINK

'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")

global

{not in Vi}

String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the

backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids

accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might

prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with

".bak" that you want to keep.

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre

autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to

include a timestamp.

:au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~'

Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.

'backupskip' 'bsk'LINK

'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +wildignore

feature}

A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the

name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both

the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.

The pattern is used like with :autocmd, see autocmd-patterns.

Watch out for special characters, see option-backslash.

When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the

default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write

your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you

lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only disable

backups if you don't care about losing the file.

Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use

$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.:

:let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'

Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a

backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see

the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and crontab.

'balloondelay' 'bdlay'LINK

'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +balloon_eval

feature}

Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See balloon-eval.

'ballooneval' 'beval' 'noballooneval' 'nobeval'LINK

'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +balloon_eval

feature}

Switch on the balloon-eval functionality.

'balloonexpr' 'bexpr'LINK

'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +balloon_eval

feature}

Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used

when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used:

v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show

v:beval_winnr number of the window

v:beval_lnum line number

v:beval_col column number (byte index)

v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer

The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!

Example:

function! MyBalloonExpr()

return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum .

\', column ' . v:beval_col .

\ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) .

\ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"'

endfunction

set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr()

set ballooneval

NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text

character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty,

Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans

or Sun Workshop).

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox when set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'balloonexpr' textlock.

To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check:

if has("balloon_multiline")

When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the

expression evaluates to a List this is equal to using each List item

as a string and putting "\n" in between them.

'binary' 'bin' 'nobinary' 'nobin'LINK

'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also

use the -b Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few

options will be changed (also when it already was on):

'textwidth' will be set to 0

'wrapmargin' will be set to 0

'modeline' will be off

'expandtab' will be off

Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the

file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>

separates lines).

The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the

file is read without conversion.

NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is

on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,

'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set

'bin' again when the file has been loaded.

The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when

'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of

saved option values.

To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the ++bin argument.

This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all

files you edit.

When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if

there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to

the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See

the 'endofline' option.

'bioskey' 'biosk' 'nobioskey' 'nobiosk'LINK

'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}

When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works

better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a

terminal over a serial port reset this option.

Also see 'conskey'.

'bomb' 'nobomb'LINK

'bomb' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte

Order Mark) is prepended to the file:

- this option is on

- the 'binary' option is off

- 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big

endian variants.

Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.

Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it

causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2

appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.

When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a

check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.

Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you

don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM

will be restored when writing the file.

'breakat' 'brk'LINK

'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +linebreak

feature}

This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line

break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit

characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.

'breakindent' 'bri'LINK

'breakindent' 'bri' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +linebreak

feature}

Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of

space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks

of text.

'breakindentopt' 'briopt'LINK

'breakindentopt' 'briopt' string (default empty)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +linebreak

feature}

Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional

items and must be separated by a comma:

min:{n} Minimum text width that will be kept after

applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting

text should normally be narrower. This prevents

text indented almost to the right window border

occupying lot of vertical space when broken.

shift:{n} After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's

beginning will be shifted by the given number of

characters. It permits dynamic French paragraph

indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line

continuation (positive).

sbr Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the

additional indent.

The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0.

'browsedir' 'bsdir'LINK

'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last")

global

{not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and

Win32 GUI}

Which directory to use for the file browser:

last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a

file was opened or saved.

buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.

current Use the current directory.

{path} Use the specified directory

'bufhidden' 'bh'LINK

'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer

displayed in a window:

<empty> follow the global 'hidden' option

hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'

is not set

unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using

:hide

delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when

'hidden' is set or using :hide, like using

:bdelete

wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when

'hidden' is set or using :hide, like using

:bwipeout

CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer

are lost without a warning. Also, these values may break autocommands

that switch between buffers temporarily.

This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify

special kinds of buffers. See special-buffers.

'buflisted' 'bl' 'nobuflisted' 'nobl' E85LINK

'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If

it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.

This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember

a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.

But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".

'buftype' 'bt' E382LINK

'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:

<empty> normal buffer

nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be

written

nowrite buffer which will not be written

acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd

autocommands. {not available when compiled without the

+autocmd feature}

quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors :cwindow

or list of locations :lwindow

help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this

manually)

This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to

specify special kinds of buffers. See special-buffers.

Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!

A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location

list. This value is set by the :cwindow and :lwindow commands and

you are not supposed to change it.

"nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:

both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't

work (":w filename" does work though).

both: The buffer is never considered to be 'modified'.

There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for

example when you quit Vim.

both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory

(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap

file).

nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a

file name. It is not modified in response to a :cd

command.

E676LINK

"acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like

"nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and

"nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned

without saving. For writing there must be matching BufWriteCmd,

FileWriteCmd or FileAppendCmd autocommands.

'casemap' 'cmp'LINK

'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain

these words, separated by a comma:

internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current

locale does not change the case mapping. This only

matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding,

"latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is

omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library

functions are used when available.

keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US

case mapping, the current locale is not effective.

This probably only matters for Turkish.

'cdpath' 'cd' E344 E346LINK

'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+file_in_path feature}

This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the

:cd and :lcd commands, provided that the directory being searched

for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./"

or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.

The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as

'path'. Also see file-searching.

The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look

in the current directory first.

If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include

a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to

override it:

:let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

(parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).

'cedit'LINK

'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.

The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.

Only non-printable keys are allowed.

The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to

type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples:

:set cedit=<C-Y>

:set cedit=<Esc>

Nvi also has this option, but it only uses the first character.

See cmdwin.

'charconvert' 'ccv' E202 E214 E513LINK

'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")

global

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

and +eval features}

{not in Vi}

An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is

evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a

different encoding from what is desired.

'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is

supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is

preferred, because it is much faster.

'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin --, because there is no

file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.

The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,

non-zero for failure.

The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.

Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are

used.

Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"

is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.

'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'

flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.

Example:

set charconvert=CharConvert()

fun CharConvert()

system("recode "

\ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to

\ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)

return v:shell_error

endfun

The related Vim variables are:

v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding

v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding

v:fname_in name of the input file

v:fname_out name of the output file

Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.

Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different

from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.

Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want

to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care

of this.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'cindent' 'cin' 'nocindent' 'nocin'LINK

'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cindent

feature}

Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys

that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your

preferred indent style.

If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.

If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,

the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an

external program.

See C-indenting.

When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'

option or 'indentexpr'.

This option is not used when 'paste' is set.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'cinkeys' 'cink'LINK

'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cindent

feature}

A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of

the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is

empty.

For the format of this option see cinkeys-format.

See C-indenting.

'cinoptions' 'cino'LINK

'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cindent

feature}

The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C

program. See cinoptions-values for the values of this option, and

C-indenting for info on C indenting in general.

'cinwords' 'cinw'LINK

'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without both the

+cindent and the +smartindent features}

These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when

'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at

an appropriate place (inside {}).

Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't

matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:

"if,If,IF".

'clipboard' 'cb'LINK

'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"

for X-windows, "" otherwise)

global

{not in Vi}

{only in GUI versions or when the +xterm_clipboard

feature is included}

This option is a list of comma separated names.

These names are recognized:

clipboard-unnamedLINK

unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'

for all yank, delete, change and put operations which

would normally go to the unnamed register. When a

register is explicitly specified, it will always be

used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'

or not. The clipboard register can always be

explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see

gui-clipboard.

clipboard-unnamedplusLINK

unnamedplus A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the

clipboard register '+' (quoteplus) instead of

register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put

operations which would normally go to the unnamed

register. When "unnamed" is also included to the

option, yank operations (but not delete, change or

put) will additionally copy the text into register

'*'.

Only available with the +X11 feature.

Availability can be checked with:

if has('unnamedplus')

clipboard-autoselectLINK

autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,

then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual

area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the

windowing system's global selection or put the

selected text on the clipboard used by the selection

register "*. See guioptions_a and quotestar for

details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in

'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this

"autoselect" flag is used.

Also applies to the modeless selection.

clipboard-autoselectplusLINK

autoselectplus Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of

the * register. Compare to the 'P' flag in

'guioptions'.

clipboard-autoselectmlLINK

autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection

only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.

clipboard-htmlLINK

html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when

pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it

as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from

Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML

in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox.

You probably want to add this only temporarily,

possibly use BufEnter autocommands.

Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.

Only available with the +multi_byte feature.

clipboard-excludeLINK

exclude:{pattern}

Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of

the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no

connection will be made to the X server. This is

useful in this situation:

- Running Vim in a console.

- $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another

display.

- You do not want to connect to the X server in the

console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.

To never connect to the X server use:

exclude:.*

This has the same effect as using the -X argument.

Note that when there is no connection to the X server

the window title won't be restored and the clipboard

cannot be accessed.

The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is

interpreted as if 'magic' was on.

The rest of the option value will be used for

{pattern}, this must be the last entry.

'cmdheight' 'ch'LINK

'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding

hit-enter prompts.

The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab

page can have a different value.

'cmdwinheight' 'cwh'LINK

'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. cmdwin

'colorcolumn' 'cc'LINK

'colorcolumn' 'cc' string (default "")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are

highlighted with ColorColumn hl-ColorColumn. Useful to align

text. Will make screen redrawing slower.

The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with

'+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'.

:set cc=+1 " highlight column after 'textwidth'

:set cc=+1,+2,+3 " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'

:hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey

When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.

A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.

'columns' 'co' E594LINK

'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)

global

{not in Vi}

Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal

initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see

posix-screen-size.

When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this

option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want

to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your gvimrc file.

When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical

number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For

the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to

what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest

window possible:

:set columns=9999

Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.

'comments' 'com' E524 E525LINK

'comments' 'com' string (default

"s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +comments

feature}

A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See

format-comments. See option-backslash about using backslashes to

insert a space.

'commentstring' 'cms' E537LINK

'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the

comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see

fold-marker.

'compatible' 'cp' 'nocompatible' 'nocp'LINK

'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a vimrc or gvimrc

file is found)

global

{not in Vi}

This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or

make Vim behave in a more useful way.

This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,

other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or

resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings

are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you

set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the

very start.

By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the

options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim

just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'

option.

When a vimrc or gvimrc file is found while Vim is starting up,

this option is switched off, and all options that have not been

modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means

that when a vimrc or gvimrc file exists, Vim will use the Vim

defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't

happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given

with the -u argument). Also see compatible-default and

posix-compliance.

You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with

"-N". See -C and -N.

Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options

that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options

marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.

At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set

or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table

below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible

editing.

See also 'cpoptions'.

option + set value effect

'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command

'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy

others: "auto" copy or rename backup file

'backspace' "" normal backspace

'backup' off no backup file

'cindent' off no C code indentation

'cedit' + "" no key to open the cmdwin

'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags

'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"

'cscopetagorder' 0 see cscopetagorder

'cscopeverbose' off see cscopeverbose

'digraph' off no digraphs

'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode

'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces

'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,

"dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2

'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting

'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"

'history' + 0 no commandline history

'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping

'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping

'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches

'incsearch' off no incremental searching

'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression

'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode

'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric

characters and '_'

'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period

'modeline' + off no modelines

'more' + off no pauses in listings

'revins' off no reverse insert

'ruler' off no ruler

'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll

'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset

'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth

'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages

'showcmd' + off command characters not shown

'showmode' + off current mode not shown

'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch

'smartindent' off no smart indentation

'smarttab' off no smart tab size

'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions

'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands

'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative

'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection

'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap

'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator

'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout

'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap

'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>

use CTRL-E for cmdline completion

'writebackup' on or off depends on the +writebackup feature

'complete' 'cpt' E535LINK

'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This option specifies how keyword completion ins-completion works

when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line

completion i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L. It indicates the type of completion

and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:

. scan the current buffer ( 'wrapscan' is ignored)

w scan buffers from other windows

b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list

u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list

U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list

k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option

kspell use the currently active spell checking spell

k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,

patterns are valid too. For example:

:set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish

s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option

s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns

are valid too.

i scan current and included files

d scan current and included files for defined name or macro

i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D

] tag completion

t same as "]"

Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds :autocmd are

not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files

(gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for

whole-line completion.

The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:

1. the current buffer

2. buffers in other windows

3. other loaded buffers

4. unloaded buffers

5. tags

6. included files

As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-

based expansion (e.g., dictionary i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K, included patterns

i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I, tags i_CTRL-X_CTRL-] and normal expansions).

'completefunc' 'cfu'LINK

'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +eval

or +insert_expand features}

This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion

with CTRL-X CTRL-U. i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U

See complete-functions for an explanation of how the function is

invoked and what it should return.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'completeopt' 'cot'LINK

'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview")

global

{not available when compiled without the

+insert_expand feature}

{not in Vi}

A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion

ins-completion. The supported values are:

menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The

menu is only shown when there is more than one match and

sufficient colors are available. ins-completion-menu

menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.

Useful when there is additional information about the

match, e.g., what file it comes from.

longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If

the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more

characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind

of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is

used.

preview Show extra information about the currently selected

completion in the preview window. Only works in

combination with "menu" or "menuone".

'concealcursor' 'cocu'LINK

'concealcursor' 'cocu' string (default: "")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +conceal

feature}

Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.

When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in

other lines.

n Normal mode

v Visual mode

i Insert mode

c Command line editing, for 'incsearch'

'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.

A useful value is "nc". This is used in help files. So long as you

are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text

or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that

you can see what you are doing.

Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's

displayed. E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.

'conceallevel' 'cole' 'conceallevel' 'cole'LINK

number (default 0)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +conceal

feature}

Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute :syn-conceal

is shown:

Value Effect

0 Text is shown normally

1 Each block of concealed text is replaced with one

character. If the syntax item does not have a custom

replacement character defined (see :syn-cchar) the

character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a

space).

It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.

2 Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a

custom replacement character defined (see

:syn-cchar).

3 Concealed text is completely hidden.

Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can

edit and copy the text. This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'

option.

'confirm' 'cf' 'noconfirm' 'nocf'LINK

'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally

fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",

instead raise a dialog asking if you wish to save the current

file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally abandon a buffer.

If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one

command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the :confirm

command.

Also see the confirm() function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.

'conskey' 'consk' 'noconskey' 'noconsk'LINK

'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}

When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.

This should work in most cases. Also see 'bioskey'. Together,

three methods of console input are available:

'conskey' 'bioskey' action

on on or off direct console input

off on BIOS

off off STDIN

'copyindent' 'ci' 'nocopyindent' 'noci'LINK

'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a

new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of

tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is enabled,

in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the

new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the

existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab

remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing

line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.

NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.

Also see 'preserveindent'.

'cpoptions' 'cpo'LINK

'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",

Vi default: all flags)

global

{not in Vi}

A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present

this indicates Vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where

not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.

'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".

Commas can be added for readability.

To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the

"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" add-option-flags.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when

the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment

variable exists posix. This means Vim tries to behave like the

POSIX specification.

contains behavior

cpo-aLINK

a When included, a ":read" command with a file name

argument will set the alternate file name for the

current window.

cpo-ALINK

A When included, a ":write" command with a file name

argument will set the alternate file name for the

current window.

cpo-bLINK

b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of

the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,

the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next

command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to

include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all

mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.

See also map_bar.

cpo-BLINK

B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,

abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.

Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a

CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"

results in X being mapped to:

'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)

'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)

('<' excluded in both cases)

cpo-cLINK

c Searching continues at the end of any match at the

cursor position, but not further than the start of the

next line. When not present searching continues

one character from the cursor position. With 'c'

"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating

"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.

cpo-CLINK

C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a

backslash. See line-continuation.

cpo-dLINK

d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use

the tags file relative to the current file, but the

tags file in the current directory.

cpo-DLINK

D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode

commands with a character argument, like r, f and

t.

cpo-eLINK

e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a

<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not

linewise. If this flag is not present, the register

is not linewise and the last line does not end in a

<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line

and can be edited before hitting <CR>.

cpo-ELINK

E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or

"gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when

at least one character is to be operate on. Example:

This makes "y0" fail in the first column.

cpo-fLINK

f When included, a ":read" command with a file name

argument will set the file name for the current buffer,

if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.

cpo-FLINK

F When included, a ":write" command with a file name

argument will set the file name for the current

buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name

yet. Also see cpo-P.

cpo-gLINK

g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.

cpo-HLINK

H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert

before the last blank. Without this flag insert after

the last blank.

cpo-iLINK

i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will

leave it modified.

cpo-ILINK

I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting

indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.

cpo-jLINK

j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',

not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.

cpo-JLINK

J A sentence has to be followed by two spaces after

the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as

white space.

cpo-kLINK

k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in

mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu

commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[

is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X

being mapped to:

'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)

'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)

Also see the '<' flag below.

cpo-KLINK

K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is

halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when

only part of the second <F1> has been read. It

enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.

cpo-lLINK

l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken

literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.

See /[]

'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'

'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>

Also see cpo-\.

cpo-LLINK

L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',

'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode

(see gR) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of

the normal behavior of a <Tab>.

cpo-mLINK

m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a

second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half

a second or until a character is typed. 'showmatch'

cpo-MLINK

M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into

account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer

parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores

backslashes, which is Vi compatible.

cpo-nLINK

n When included, the column used for 'number' and

'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped

lines.

cpo-oLINK

o Line offset to search command is not remembered for

next search.

cpo-OLINK

O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even

when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a

protection against a file unexpectedly created by

someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.

cpo-pLINK

p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a

slightly better algorithm is used.

cpo-PLINK

P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a

file will set the file name for the current buffer, if

the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and

the 'F' flag is also included cpo-F.

cpo-qLINK

q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the

position where it would be when joining two lines.

cpo-rLINK

r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search

command, instead of the actually used search string.

cpo-RLINK

R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag

marks are kept like :keepmarks was used.

cpo-sLINK

s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the

first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.

And it is the default. If not present the options are

set when the buffer is created.

cpo-SLINK

S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer

(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and

'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.

The options are set to the values in the current

buffer. When you change an option and go to another

buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the

buffer options global to all buffers.

's' 'S' copy buffer options

no no when buffer created

yes no when buffer first entered (default)

X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)

cpo-tLINK

t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for

"n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in

the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the

last used search pattern.

cpo-uLINK

u Undo is Vi compatible. See undo-two-ways.

cpo-vLINK

v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in

Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are

erased from the screen right away. With this flag the

screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced

characters.

cpo-wLINK

w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one

character and not all blanks until the start of the

next word.

cpo-WLINK

W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"

overwrites a readonly file, if possible.

cpo-xLINK

x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.

The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,

because <Esc> normally aborts a command. c_<Esc>

cpo-XLINK

X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is

deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "."

and a count.

cpo-yLINK

y A yank command can be redone with ".".

cpo-ZLINK

Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,

don't reset 'readonly'.

cpo-!LINK

! When redoing a filter command, use the last used

external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last

used -filter- command is used.

cpo-$LINK

$ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the

line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.

The changed text will be overwritten when you type the

new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any

command that moves the cursor from the insertion

point.

cpo-%LINK

% Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.

Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.

Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".

Parens inside single and double quotes are also

counted, causing a string that contains a paren to

disturb the matching. For example, in a line like

"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not

match the last one. When this flag is not included,

parens inside single and double quotes are treated

specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,

everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a

paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if

there is one). This works very well for C programs.

This flag is also used for other features, such as

C-indenting.

cpo--LINK

- When included, a vertical movement command fails when

it would go above the first line or below the last

line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or

last line, unless it already was in that line.

Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j",

CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234".

cpo-+LINK

+ When included, a ":write file" command will reset the

'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer

itself may still be different from its file.

cpo-starLINK

* Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,

":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.

cpo-<LINK

< Disable the recognition of special key codes in <>

form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of

menu commands. For example, the command

":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:

'<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)

'<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)

Also see the 'k' flag above.

cpo->LINK

> When appending to a register, put a line break before

the appended text.

cpo-;LINK

; When using , or ; to repeat the last t search

and the cursor is right in front of the searched

character, the cursor won't move. When not included,

the cursor would skip over it and jump to the

following occurrence.

POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except

when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. posix

contains behavior

cpo-#LINK

# A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect.

cpo-&LINK

& When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when

exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded.

This flag is tested when exiting.

cpo-\LINK

\ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken

literally, only "\]" is special See /[]

'\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-'

'\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-'

Also see cpo-l.

cpo-/LINK

/ When "%" is used as the replacement string in a :s

command, use the previous replacement string. :s%

cpo-{LINK

{ The { and } commands also stop at a "{" character

at the start of a line.

cpo-.LINK

. The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current

buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't

need this, since it remembers the full path of an

opened file.

cpo-barLINK

| The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment

variables overrule the terminal size values obtained

with system specific functions.

'cryptmethod' 'cm'LINK

'cryptmethod' 'cm' string (default "zip")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file:

pkzipLINK

zip PkZip compatible method. A weak kind of encryption.

Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older.

blowfishLINK

blowfish Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption but it has

an implementation flaw. Requires Vim 7.3 or later,

files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older. This adds

a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file

the encrypted bytes will be different.

blowfish2LINK

blowfish2 Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption. Requires

Vim 7.4.399 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3

and older. This adds a "seed" to the file, every time

you write the file the encrypted bytes will be

different. The whole undo file is encrypted, not just

the pieces of text.

When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically

to the detected method of the file being read. Thus if you write it

without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used.

Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to

explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other

modifications. Also see :X.

When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with

the value "zip". When setting the local value to an empty string the

buffer will use the global value.

When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and

the current version does not recognize it, you will get E821 .LINK

You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim.

'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc'LINK

'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.

See cscopepathcomp.

'cscopeprg' 'csprg'LINK

'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

Specifies the command to execute cscope. See cscopeprg.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'cscopequickfix' 'csqf'LINK

'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

or +quickfix features}

{not in Vi}

Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.

See cscopequickfix.

'cscoperelative' 'csre' 'nocscoperelative' 'nocsre'LINK

'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off)

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables

to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix.

See cscoperelative.

'cscopetag' 'cst' 'nocscopetag' 'nocst'LINK

'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

Use cscope for tag commands. See cscope-options.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'cscopetagorder' 'csto'LINK

'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See

cscopetagorder.

NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

'cscopeverbose' 'csverb'LINK

'nocscopeverbose' 'nocsverb'LINK

'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)

global

{not available when compiled without the +cscope

feature}

{not in Vi}

Give messages when adding a cscope database. See cscopeverbose.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'cursorbind' 'crb' 'nocursorbind' 'nocrb'LINK

'cursorbind' 'crb' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cursorbind

feature}

When this option is set, as the cursor in the current

window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have

this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and

column. This option is useful for viewing the

differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,

inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are

taken into account.

'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' 'nocursorcolumn' 'nocuc'LINK

'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn

hl-CursorColumn. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing

slower.

If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use

these autocommands:

au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn

au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn

'cursorline' 'cul' 'nocursorline' 'nocul'LINK

'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine

hl-CursorLine. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen

redrawing slower.

When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it

easier to see the selected text.

'debug'LINK

'debug' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

These values can be used:

msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given

anyway.

throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given

anyway and also throw an exception and set v:errmsg.

beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be

produced.

The values can be combined, separated by a comma.

"msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or

'indentexpr'.

'define' 'def'LINK

'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search

pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the

commands like "[i" and "[d" include-search. The 'isident' option is

used to recognize the defined name after the match:

{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}

See option-backslash about inserting backslashes to include a space

or backslash.

The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be

useful, to include const type declarations:

^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)

When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!

'delcombine' 'deco' 'nodelcombine' 'nodeco'LINK

'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode

"x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the

default) the character along with its combining characters are

deleted.

Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!

This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one

may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want

to remove only the combining ones.

'dictionary' 'dict'LINK

'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words

for keyword completion commands i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K. Each file should

contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several

words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is

preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.

When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell

checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. spell

To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces

after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file

name. See option-backslash about using backslashes.

This has nothing to do with the Dictionary variable type.

Where to find a list of words?

- On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".

- In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.

- In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

'diff' 'nodiff'LINK

'diff' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +diff

feature}

Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences

between files. See vimdiff.

'dex' 'diffexpr'LINK

'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +diff

feature}

Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two

versions of a file. See diff-diffexpr.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'dip' 'diffopt'LINK

'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +diff

feature}

Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.

All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.

filler Show filler lines, to keep the text

synchronized with a window that has inserted

lines at the same position. Mostly useful

when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'

is set.

context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change

and a fold that contains unchanged lines.

When omitted a context of six lines is used.

See fold-diff.

icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"

are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag

to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.

iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds

the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if

'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation

of the "diff" command for what this does

exactly. It should ignore adding trailing

white space, but not leading white space.

horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless

explicitly specified otherwise).

vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless

explicitly specified otherwise).

foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when

starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used.

Examples:

:set diffopt=filler,context:4

:set diffopt=

:set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3

'digraph' 'dg' 'nodigraph' 'nodg'LINK

'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +digraphs

feature}

Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>

{char2}. See digraphs.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'directory' 'dir'LINK

'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",

for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:\tmp,c:\temp"

for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")

global

List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.

- The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is

possible.

- Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is

impossible!).

- A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as

the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so

it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden"

attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.

- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to

put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading

"." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.

- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//"

or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to

the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs.

This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.

On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//",

since "\\" will include the comma in the file name.

- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part

of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory

name, precede it with a backslash.

- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.

- A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.

- Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to

get one in the option (see option-backslash), for example:

:set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces

- For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start

of the option is removed.

Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing

the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is

discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.

"/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better

choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap

files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your

home directory is tried first.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

{Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}

'display' 'dy'LINK

'display' 'dy' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of

flags:

lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line

in a window will be displayed. When not included, a

last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.

uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>

instead of using ^C and ~C.

'eadirection' 'ead'LINK

'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:

ver vertically, width of windows is not affected

hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected

both width and height of windows is affected

'ed' 'edcompatible' 'noed' 'noedcompatible'LINK

'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)

global

Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be

toggled each time the flag is given. See complex-change. See

also 'gdefault' option.

Switching this option on is discouraged!

'encoding' 'enc' E543LINK

'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)

global

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

{not in Vi}

Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in

the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the

viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work

with. See encoding-names for the possible values.

NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the

existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid.

It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim

starts up. See multibyte. To reload the menus see :menutrans.

This option cannot be set from a modeline. It would most likely

corrupt the text.

NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to

"utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of

'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and

avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made

the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal

versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files

without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).

The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.

This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with

iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.

If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you

can use:

if has("multi_byte_encoding")

Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will

be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If

'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be

set to convert typed and displayed text. See encoding-table.

When you set this option, it fires the EncodingChanged autocommand

event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.

When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus

you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated

to '-' signs.

When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.

For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes

"iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".

Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.

This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the

actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and

'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using

utf-8.

When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.

You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the

viminfo-file. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus

setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has

effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.

When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was

not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.

'endofline' 'eol' 'noendofline' 'noeol'LINK

'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option

is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This

option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless

the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in

which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this

option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the

file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a

<EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file

the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change

it if you want to.

'equalalways' 'ea' 'noequalalways' 'noea'LINK

'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after

splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the

option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the

size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When

closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it

(depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').

When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size

is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The

'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.

Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting

'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.

If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are

currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in

the future).

'equalprg' 'ep'LINK

'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty

the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'

or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting,

the "indent" program is used.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env. See option-backslash

about including spaces and backslashes.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'errorbells' 'eb' 'noerrorbells' 'noeb'LINK

'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)

global

Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only

makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always

for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal

mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,

screen flash or do nothing.

'errorfile' 'ef'LINK

'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",

others: "errors.err")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see :cf).

When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the

following argument. See -q.

NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'errorformat' 'efm'LINK

'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file

(see errorformat).

'esckeys' 'ek' 'noesckeys' 'noek'LINK

'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)

global

{not in Vi}

Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert

mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be

used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of

this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of

after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to

try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that

when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys

won't work by default.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'eventignore' 'ei'LINK

'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +autocmd

feature}

A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.

When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand

events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.

Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example:

:set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave

'expandtab' 'et' 'noexpandtab' 'noet'LINK

'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a

<Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and

when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is

on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also :retab and ins-expandtab.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'exrc' 'ex' 'noexrc' 'noex'LINK

'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current

directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider

setting the 'secure' option (see initialization). Using a local

.exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!

also see .vimrc and gui-init.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'fileencoding' 'fenc' E213LINK

'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")

local to buffer

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

{not in Vi}

Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.

When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be

done when writing the file. For reading see below.

When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be

used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).

Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are

both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's

because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8.

WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When

'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion

is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion

results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some

characters may be lost!

See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be

specified that can be handled by the converter, see

mbyte-conversion.

When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.

To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting

'fileencoding', use the ++enc argument. One exception: when

'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.

For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.

Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.

When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus

you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are

replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for

'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example

"ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".

When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'

option is set, because the file would be different when written.

Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens

AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be

written. If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set

'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".

This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.

'fe'LINK

NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the

whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The

old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.

'fileencodings' 'fencs'LINK

'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom",

"ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when

'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)

global

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

{not in Vi}

This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit

an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first

mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one

in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works,

'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to

an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.

WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When

'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)

conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse

conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not

"utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use

the ++bad argument to specify what is done with characters

that can't be converted.

For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings

will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except

"ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer

another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your

preferred encoding is to be used. Example:

au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |

\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif

This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain

non-blank characters.

When the ++enc argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is

not used.

Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value

of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with:

:setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2

This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than

an empty file.

The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM

(Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded

by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.

An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,

because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always

accepted.

The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the

environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful

when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a

non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.

When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte

sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the 8g8

command to find the illegal byte sequence.

WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:

latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used

utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8

file

cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used

If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.

See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.

Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file

is read.

'fileformat' 'ff'LINK

'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",

Unix default: "unix",

Macintosh default: "mac")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for

reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:

dos <CR> <NL>

unix <NL>

mac <CR>

When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.

See file-formats and file-read.

For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.

When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O

works like it was set to "unix".

This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and

'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.

When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'

option is set, because the file would be different when written.

This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.

For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",

'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.

'fileformats' 'ffs'LINK

'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:

Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",

Vim Unix: "unix,dos",

Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",

Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",

Vi others: "")

global

{not in Vi}

This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when

starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing

buffer:

- When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used

always. It is not set automatically.

- When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer

is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The

'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing

buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.

- When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic

<EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to

edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:

1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",

'fileformat' is set to "dos".

2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'

is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a

preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".

3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if 'fileformats'

includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".

This means that "mac" is only chosen when:

"unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and

"dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.

Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before

the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in

the first few lines, "mac" is used.

4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from

'fileformats' is used.

When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but

this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that

file only, the option is not changed.

When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.

Note that when Vim starts up with an empty buffer this option is not

used. Set 'fileformat' in your .vimrc instead.

For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that

are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be

done:

- When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos

format will be used.

- When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection

is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a

<CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is

used.

Also see file-formats.

For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty

string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,

otherwise 'textauto' is set.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'fileignorecase' 'fic' 'nofileignorecase' 'nofic'LINK

'fileignorecase' 'fic' boolean (default on for systems where case in file

names is normally ignored)

global

{not in Vi}

When set case is ignored when using file names and directories.

See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion.

'filetype' 'ft'LINK

'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +autocmd

feature}

When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.

All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be

executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file

name.

Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.

This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable

this use the ":filetype on" command. :filetype

Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,

for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.

Example, for in an IDL file:

/* vim: set filetype=idl : */

FileType filetypes

When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype

names. Example:

/* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */

This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.

This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than

one dot may appear.

This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or

'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

'fillchars' 'fcs'LINK

'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

and +folding features}

Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.

It is a comma separated list of items:

item default Used for

stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window

stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows

vert:c '|' vertical separators :vsplit

fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'

diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option

Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and

"stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'

otherwise.

Example:

:set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-

This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also

be used when there is highlighting.

for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported.

The highlighting used for these items:

item highlight group

stl:c StatusLine hl-StatusLine

stlnc:c StatusLineNC hl-StatusLineNC

vert:c VertSplit hl-VertSplit

fold:c Folded hl-Folded

diff:c DiffDelete hl-DiffDelete

'fkmap' 'fk' 'nofkmap' 'nofk'LINK

'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) E198LINK

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.

Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to

toggle this option i_CTRL-_. See farsi.txt.

'foldclose' 'fcl'LINK

'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and

its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to

automatically close when moving out of them.

'foldcolumn' 'fdc'LINK

'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side

of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum

value is 12.

See folding.

'foldenable' 'fen' 'nofoldenable' 'nofen'LINK

'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly

switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with

folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled

with the zi command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when

'foldenable' is off.

This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.

See folding.

'foldexpr' 'fde'LINK

'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

or +eval features}

The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated

for each line to obtain its fold level. See fold-expr.

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox if set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option.

This option can't be set from a modeline when the 'diff' option is

on.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'foldexpr' textlock.

'foldignore' 'fdi'LINK

'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with

characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding

lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.

The default "#" works well for C programs. See fold-indent.

'foldlevel' 'fdl'LINK

'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.

Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will

close fewer folds.

This option is set by commands like zm, zM and zR.

See fold-foldlevel.

'foldlevelstart' 'fdls'LINK

'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.

Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),

some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).

This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline

overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for diff-mode also

ignores this option and closes all folds.

It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to

overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.

When the value is negative, it is not used.

'foldmarker' 'fmr' E536LINK

'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There

must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The

marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).

See fold-marker.

'foldmethod' 'fdm'LINK

'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:

fold-manual manual Folds are created manually.

fold-indent indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.

fold-expr expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.

fold-marker marker Markers are used to specify folds.

fold-syntax syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.

fold-diff diff Fold text that is not changed.

'foldminlines' 'fml'LINK

'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed

closed. Also for manually closed folds. With the default value of

one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.

Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.

Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed. After using

"zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller

than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.

'foldnestmax' 'fdn'LINK

'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"

methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more

than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.

'foldopen' 'fdo'LINK

'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,

search,tag,undo")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the

command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated

list of items.

NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.

Add the zv command to the mapping to get the same effect.

(rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)

item commands

all any

block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.

hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.

insert any command in Insert mode

jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.

mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.

percent "%"

quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.

search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.

(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)

Also for [s and ]s.

tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.

undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R

When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")

this option is not used. This means the operator will include the

whole closed fold.

Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it

very difficult to move onto a closed fold.

In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open

when text is inserted.

To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the zx command or

set the 'foldclose' option to "all".

'foldtext' 'fdt'LINK

'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +folding

feature}

An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed

fold. See fold-foldtext.

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox if set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'foldtext' textlock.

'formatoptions' 'fo'LINK

'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic

formatting is to be done. See fo-table. When the 'paste' option is

on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can

be inserted for readability.

To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the

"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" add-option-flags.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'formatlistpat' 'flp'LINK

'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for

the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.

The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for

the line below it. You can use /\ze to mark the end of the match

while still checking more characters. There must be a character

following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled

like there is no match.

The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation

character and white space.

'formatprg' 'fp'LINK

'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines

selected with the gq operator. The program must take the input on

stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is

such a program.

If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead.

Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal

format function will be used C-indenting.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env. See option-backslash

about including spaces and backslashes.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'formatexpr' 'fex'LINK

'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +eval

feature}

Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the gq

operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions'). When this

option is empty 'formatprg' is used.

The v:lnum variable holds the first line to be formatted.

The v:count variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.

The v:char variable holds the character that is going to be

inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to

automatic formatting. This can be empty. Don't insert

it yet!

Example:

:set formatexpr=mylang#Format()

This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the

autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. autoload

The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding

text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as

when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the

same spot relative to the text then! The mode() function will

return "i" or "R" in this situation.

When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using

the internal format mechanism.

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox when set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option. That stops the option from working,

since changing the buffer text is not allowed.

'fsync' 'fs'LINK

'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a

file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely

written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This

will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop

mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that

turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On

systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always

off.

Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.

'gdefault' 'gd' 'nogdefault' 'nogd'LINK

'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that

all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag

is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution

of all or one match. See complex-change.

command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off

:s/// subst. all subst. one

:s///g subst. one subst. all

:s///gg subst. all subst. one

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'grepformat' 'gfm'LINK

'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")

global

{not in Vi}

Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.

This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the

'errorformat' option: see errorformat.

'grepprg' 'gp'LINK

'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",

Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",

Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",

VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Program to use for the :grep command. This option may contain '%'

and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-

line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments

will be included. Environment variables are expanded :set_env. See

option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"

also work well with a single file:

:set grepprg=grep\ -nH

Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the :grep command

works like :vimgrep, :lgrep like :lvimgrep, :grepadd like

:vimgrepadd and :lgrepadd like :lvimgrepadd.

See also the section :make_makeprg, since most of the comments there

apply equally to 'grepprg'.

For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,

otherwise it's "grep -n".

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'guicursor' 'gcr' E545 E546 E548 E549LINK

'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,

ve:ver35-Cursor,

o:hor50-Cursor,

i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,

r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,

sm:block-Cursor

-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",

for MS-DOS and Win32 console:

"n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,

r-cr:hor30,sm:block")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and

for MS-DOS and Win32 console}

This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different

modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only

the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by

specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or

horizontal cursor.

For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.

The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a

mode-list and an argument-list:

mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..

The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:

n Normal mode

v Visual mode

ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',

if not specified)

o Operator-pending mode

i Insert mode

r Replace mode

c Command-line Normal (append) mode

ci Command-line Insert mode

cr Command-line Replace mode

sm showmatch in Insert mode

a all modes

The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:

hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height

ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width

block block cursor, fills the whole character

[only one of the above three should be present]

blinkwait{N} cursor-blinkingLINK

blinkon{N}

blinkoff{N}

blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before

the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that

the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the

cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one

of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The

default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".

These numbers are used for a missing entry. This

means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch

blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only

blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while

executing a command.

To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see

xterm-blink.

{group-name}

a highlight group name, that sets the color and font

for the cursor

{group-name}/{group-name}

Two highlight group names, the first is used when

no language mappings are used, the other when they

are. language-mapping

Examples of parts:

n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a

block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"

highlight group

i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150

In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a

30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the

"iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit

faster.

The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for

all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used

to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off

blinking: "a:blinkon0"

Examples of cursor highlighting:

:highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE

:highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg

'guifont' 'gfn'LINK

E235 E596LINK

'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}

This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.

In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When

the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other

font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.

The first valid font is used.

On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is

not empty, then 'guifont' is not used.

Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name

precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra

backslash before a space and a backslash. See also

option-backslash. For example:

:set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas

will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it

will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.

If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.

If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource

settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it

will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in

the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim

will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.

For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon:

:set guifont=*

will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.

The font name depends on the GUI used. See setting-guifont for a

way to set 'guifont' for various systems.

For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this:

:set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11

That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work

well:

if has("gui_gtk2")

set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12

set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12

endif

For Mac OSX you can use something like this:

:set guifont=Monaco:h10

Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems.

E236LINK

Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same

width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but

mono-spaced fonts look best.

To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"

program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.

For the Win32 GUI E244 E245LINK

- takes these options in the font name:

hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)

wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)

b - bold

i - italic

u - underline

s - strikeout

cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,

BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,

HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,

SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.

Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".

Use a ':' to separate the options.

- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use

backslashes to escape the spaces.

- Examples:

:set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN

:set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5

See also font-sizes.

'guifontset' 'gfs'LINK

E250 E252 E234 E597 E598LINK

'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and

with the +xfontset feature}

{not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}

When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first

one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See

xfontset.

Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as

a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the

:highlight command.

The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the

character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting

'guifontset' will fail.

Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'

the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be

used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,

including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative

fontset names.

This example works on many X11 systems:

:set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*

'guifontwide' 'gfw' E231 E533 E534LINK

'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}

When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used

for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is

used.

Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one

specified with 'guifont' and the same height.

All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:

'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and

'guifontset' is empty or invalid.

When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and

'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching

double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.

GTK+ 2 GUI only: guifontwide_gtk2LINK

If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width

characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".

Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'

automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the

font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need

to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice

made by Pango/Xft.

Windows +multibyte only: guifontwide_win_mbyteLINK

If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'.

'guiheadroom' 'ghr'LINK

'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)

global

{not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}

The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting

the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,

e.g., in your gvimrc file. When zero, the whole screen height will

be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel

lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the

screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the

screen.

'guioptions' 'go'LINK

'guioptions' 'go' string (default "egmrLtT" (MS-Windows),

"aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}

This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a

sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the

GUI should be used.

To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the

"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" add-option-flags.

Valid letters are as follows:

guioptions_a 'go-a'LINK

'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,

or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of

the windowing system's global selection. This means that the

Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other

applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode

ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an

application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text

is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.

Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other

applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.

If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the

windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to

by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.

The same applies to the modeless selection.

'go-P'LINK

'P' Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*

register.

'go-A'LINK

'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only

applies to the modeless selection.

'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless

"" - -

"a" yes yes

"A" - yes

"aA" yes yes

'go-c'LINK

'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple

choices.

'go-e'LINK

'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.

'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.

When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.

The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently

GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows.

'go-f'LINK

'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell

where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the

editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you

can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the

foreground. gui-fork

Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have

happened already when the gvimrc file is read.

'go-i'LINK

'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper

corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of

limitations of X11. For a color icon, see X11-icon.

'go-m'LINK

'm' Menu bar is present.

'go-M'LINK

'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note

that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before

switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the gvimrc

file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the

":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).

'go-g'LINK

'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If

'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.

Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.

'go-t'LINK

't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,

GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.

'go-T'LINK

'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon

and Athena GUIs.

'go-r'LINK

'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.

'go-R'LINK

'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically

split window.

'go-l'LINK

'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.

'go-L'LINK

'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically

split window.

'go-b'LINK

'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on

the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'

flag is included. gui-horiz-scroll

'go-h'LINK

'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor

line. Reduces computations. gui-horiz-scroll

And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if

you really want to :-). See gui-scrollbars for more information.

'go-v'LINK

'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,

a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a

vertical layout is used anyway.

'go-p'LINK

'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some

window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at

the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done

before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or

removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.

'go-F'LINK

'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See gui-footer.

'guipty' 'noguipty'LINK

'guipty' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}

Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for

I/O to/from shell commands. See gui-pty.

'guitablabel' 'gtl'LINK

'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and

with the +windows feature}

When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab

pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a

default label. See setting-guitablabel for more info.

The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.

'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below.

Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be

present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is

used.

'guitabtooltip' 'gtt'LINK

'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and

with the +windows feature}

When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab

pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.

This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.

You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use :let:

:let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two"

'helpfile' 'hf'LINK

'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"

(others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")

global

{not in Vi}

Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be

placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories

in 'runtimepath' will be used.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env. For example:

"$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also

tried. Also see $VIMRUNTIME and option-backslash about including

spaces and backslashes.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'helpheight' 'hh'LINK

'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the

":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the

current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other

windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is

set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.

'helplang' 'hlg'LINK

'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty)

global

{only available when compiled with the +multi_lang

feature}

{not in Vi}

Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language

for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always

be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over

another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that

language and not in the English help.

Example:

:set helplang=de,it

This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help

files.

When using CTRL-] and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will

try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.

See help-translated.

'hidden' 'hid' 'nohidden' 'nohid'LINK

'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When off a buffer is unloaded when it is abandoned. When on a

buffer becomes hidden when it is abandoned. If the buffer is still

displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.

The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer

hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is

modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'

flag was used. See also windows.txt.

To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.

This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" :hide.

WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.

Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".

'highlight' 'hl'LINK

'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):

"8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,

e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,

M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,N:CursorLineNr,

r:Question,s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,

c:VertSplit, t:Title,v:Visual,

w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,

f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,

C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,

>:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,

R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,

+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,

x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")

global

{not in Vi}

This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various

occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The

first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to

use for that occasion. The occasions are:

hl-SpecialKey 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"

hl-NonText @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and

characters from 'showbreak'

hl-Directory d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special

things in listings

hl-ErrorMsg e error messages

h (obsolete, ignored)

hl-IncSearch i 'incsearch' highlighting

hl-Search l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')

hl-MoreMsg m more-prompt

hl-ModeMsg M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")

hl-LineNr n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and

when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.

hl-CursorLineNr N like n for when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is

set.

hl-Question r hit-enter prompt and yes/no questions

hl-StatusLine s status line of current window status-line

hl-StatusLineNC S status lines of not-current windows

hl-Title t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.

hl-VertSplit c column used to separate vertically split windows

hl-Visual v Visual mode

hl-VisualNOS V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the

Selection" Only X11 Gui's gui-x11 and

xterm-clipboard.

hl-WarningMsg w warning messages

hl-WildMenu W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'

hl-Folded f line used for closed folds

hl-FoldColumn F 'foldcolumn'

hl-DiffAdd A added line in diff mode

hl-DiffChange C changed line in diff mode

hl-DiffDelete D deleted line in diff mode

hl-DiffText T inserted text in diff mode

hl-SignColumn > column used for signs

hl-SpellBad B misspelled word spell

hl-SpellCap P word that should start with capital spell

hl-SpellRare R rare word spell

hl-SpellLocal L word from other region spell

hl-Conceal - the placeholders used for concealed characters

(see 'conceallevel')

hl-Pmenu + popup menu normal line

hl-PmenuSel = popup menu normal line

hl-PmenuSbar x popup menu scrollbar

hl-PmenuThumb X popup menu scrollbar thumb

The display modes are:

r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")

i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")

b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")

s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")

u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")

c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce")

n no highlighting

- no highlighting

: use a highlight group

The default is used for occasions that are not included.

If you want to change what the display modes do, see dos-colors

for an example.

When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of

a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type

of highlighting, including using color. See :highlight on how to

define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.

See highlight-default for the default highlight groups.

'hlsearch' 'hls' 'nohlsearch' 'nohls'LINK

'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+extra_search feature}

When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.

The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the

'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by

default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets

are not applied.

See also: 'incsearch' and :match.

When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it

off with :nohlsearch. This does not change the option value, as

soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.

'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.

When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to

highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the

search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first

line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not

drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.

You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup

with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' viminfo-h.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'history' 'hi'LINK

'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0)

global

{not in Vi}

A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns

is remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in

each of these histories (see cmdline-editing).

The maximum value is 10000.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'hkmap' 'hk' 'nohkmap' 'nohk'LINK

'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.

Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to

toggle this option. See rileft.txt.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'hkmapp' 'hkp' 'nohkmapp' 'nohkp'LINK

'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.

This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.

See rileft.txt.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'icon' 'noicon'LINK

'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +title

feature}

When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of

'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file

currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.

Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.

Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently

only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are

Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the

builtin termcap).

When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be

restored if possible X11. See X11-icon for changing the icon on

X11.

For MS-Windows the icon can be changed, see windows-icon.

'iconstring'LINK

'iconstring' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +title

feature}

When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of

the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.

Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text

(currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).

Does not work for MS Windows.

When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be

restored if possible X11.

When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be

expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See

'titlestring' for example settings.

{not available when compiled without the +statusline feature}

'ignorecase' 'ic' 'noignorecase' 'noic'LINK

'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)

global

Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags

file.

Also see 'smartcase'.

Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see

/ignorecase.

'imactivatefunc' 'imaf'LINK

'imactivatefunc' 'imaf' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with +xim and

+GUI_GTK}

This option specifies a function that will be called to

activate/inactivate Input Method.

Example:

function ImActivateFunc(active)

if a:active

... do something

else

... do something

endif

" return value is not used

endfunction

set imactivatefunc=ImActivateFunc

'imactivatekey' 'imak'LINK

'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with +xim and

+GUI_GTK} E599LINK

Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for

activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control

IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.

You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option

tells Vim what the key is.

Format:

[MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING

These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):

S Shift key

L Lock key

C Control key

1 Mod1 key

2 Mod2 key

3 Mod3 key

4 Mod4 key

5 Mod5 key

Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are

both shift+ctrl+space.

See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.

Example:

:set imactivatekey=S-space

"S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +

canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).

'imcmdline' 'imc' 'noimcmdline' 'noimc'LINK

'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +xim,

+multi_byte_ime or global-ime features}

When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command

line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).

Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering

English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented

characters with dead keys.

'imdisable' 'imd' 'noimdisable' 'noimd'LINK

'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +xim,

+multi_byte_ime or global-ime features}

When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable

the IM when it doesn't work properly.

Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This

may change in later releases.

'iminsert' 'imi'LINK

'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in

Insert mode. Valid values:

0 :lmap is off and IM is off

1 :lmap is ON and IM is off

2 :lmap is off and IM is ON

2 is available only when compiled with the +multi_byte_ime, +xim

or global-ime.

To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>

this can be used:

:inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>

This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert

mode.

Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode

i_CTRL-^.

The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.

It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".

The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM

methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.

'imsearch' 'ims'LINK

'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when

entering a search pattern. Valid values:

-1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like

'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern

0 :lmap is off and IM is off

1 :lmap is ON and IM is off

2 :lmap is off and IM is ON

Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode

c_CTRL-^.

The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'

option to a valid keymap name.

The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM

methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.

'imstatusfunc' 'imsf'LINK

'imstatusfunc' 'imsf' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with +xim and

+GUI_GTK}

This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status

of Input Method. It must return a positive number when IME is active.

Example:

function ImStatusFunc()

let is_active = ...do something

return is_active ? 1 : 0

endfunction

set imstatusfunc=ImStatusFunc

NOTE: This function is invoked very often. Keep it fast.

'include' 'inc'LINK

'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+find_in_path feature}

Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search

pattern, just like for the "/" command (See pattern). The default

value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",

"]I", "[d", etc.

Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that

comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern

then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it

appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters

that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use

'includeexpr' to process the matched text.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

'includeexpr' 'inex'LINK

'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+find_in_path or +eval features}

Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'

option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java:

:set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')

The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.

Also used for the gf command if an unmodified file name can't be

found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.

Also used for <cfile>.

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox when set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'includeexpr' textlock.

'incsearch' 'is' 'noincsearch' 'nois'LINK

'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+extra_search features}

While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed

so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern

is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated

often, this is only useful on fast terminals.

Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its

original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You

still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the

cursor to the match.

When compiled with the +reltime feature Vim only searches for about

half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the

match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you

are typing the pattern.

The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.

See also: 'hlsearch'.

CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match

to the command line. If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the

command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is

converted to lowercase.

CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current

match, excluding the characters that were already typed.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'indentexpr' 'inde'LINK

'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cindent

or +eval features}

Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.

It is used when a new line is created, for the = operator and

in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.

When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and

'smartindent' indenting. When 'lisp' is set, this option is

overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm.

When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.

The expression is evaluated with v:lnum set to the line number for

which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line

when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).

The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It

can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is

used for the indent).

Functions useful for computing the indent are indent(), cindent()

and lispindent().

The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must

not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the

cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.

Normally this option would be set to call a function:

:set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()

Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains

"msg".

See indent-expression.

NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.

The expression will be evaluated in the sandbox when set from a

modeline, see sandbox-option.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'indentexpr' textlock.

'indentkeys' 'indk'LINK

'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +cindent

feature}

A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of

the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.

The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see indentkeys-format.

See C-indenting and indent-expression.

'infercase' 'inf' 'noinfercase' 'noinf'LINK

'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

When doing keyword completion in insert mode ins-completion, and

'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending

on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter

where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made

lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match

has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,

and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.

With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.

'insertmode' 'im' 'noinsertmode' 'noim'LINK

'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful

if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for evim.

These Insert mode commands will be useful:

- Use the cursor keys to move around.

- Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command i_CTRL-O). When

this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.

Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.

- Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use

<Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor

left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. i_CTRL-L

These items change when 'insertmode' is set:

- when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.

- <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.

- <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.

- CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.

- CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see CTRL-Z. i_CTRL-ZLINK

However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like

'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same

mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.

When executing commands with :normal 'insertmode' is not used.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'isfname' 'isf'LINK

'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:

"@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="

for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"

for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"

for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="

otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")

global

{not in Vi}

The characters specified by this option are included in file names and

path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in

the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a pattern.

Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the

characters up to 255 are specified with this option.

For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.

Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a

space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim

doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.

It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.

Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to

do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit

tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special

characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file

name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The

'&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for

cmd.exe.

The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.

Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two

character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a

decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does

not work for digits). Example:

"_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range

128 to 140 and '#' to 43)

If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range

will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left

to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is

included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the

option or the end of a range. Example:

"^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')

If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE

are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,

plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:

"@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower

case ASCII letters.

"a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.

A comma can be included by using it where a character number is

expected. Example:

"48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.

A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:

" -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding

comma, plus <Tab>.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

'isident' 'isi'LINK

'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:

"@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"

otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")

global

{not in Vi}

The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.

Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a

match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a

pattern. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this

option.

Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding

environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to

expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.

'iskeyword' 'isk'LINK

'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:

"@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"

otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"

Vi default: "@,48-57,_")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:

"w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a pattern. See

'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C

programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".

For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except

'*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that

command).

When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'isprint' 'isp'LINK

'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:

"@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")

global

{not in Vi}

The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the

screen. It is also used for "\p" in a pattern. The characters from

space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,

even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See

'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.

Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:

0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"

32 - 126 always single characters

127 "^?"

128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"

160 - 254 "| " - "|~"

255 "~?"

When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are

displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.

When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are

displayed as <xx>.

The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.

hl-SpecialKey

Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the

characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character

is printable but it is not available in the current font, a

replacement character will be shown.

Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.

There is no option to specify these characters.

'joinspaces' 'js' 'nojoinspaces' 'nojs'LINK

'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.

When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.

Otherwise only one space is inserted.

NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.

'key'LINK

'key' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +cryptv

feature}

The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.

See encryption and 'cryptmethod'.

Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed

key. Use the :X command. But you can make 'key' empty:

:set key=

It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or

"echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't

know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,

be careful not to make a typing error!

You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is

enabled. When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars).

'keymap' 'kmp' E544LINK

'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +keymap

feature}

Name of a keyboard mapping. See mbyte-keymap.

Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of

setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.

'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

'keymodel' 'km'LINK

'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys

can do. These values can be used:

startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either

Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being

present in 'selectmode').

stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.

Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,

<PageUp> and <PageDown>.

The 'keymodel' option is set by the :behave command.

'keywordprg' 'kp'LINK

'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",

OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Program to use for the K command. Environment variables are

expanded :set_env. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal

help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty

value did this, which is now deprecated.)

When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the

"K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the

"-s" is removed when there is no count.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

Example:

:set keywordprg=man\ -s

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'langmap' 'lmap' E357 E358LINK

'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +langmap

feature}

This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language

mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are

inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes

care of translating these special characters to the original meaning

of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to

be able to execute Normal mode commands.

This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are

mapped in Insert mode.

Also consider setting 'langnoremap' to avoid 'langmap' applies to

characters resulting from a mapping.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): greek LINK

:set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz

Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands):

:set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ

The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each

part can be in one of two forms:

1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately

followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".

2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"

characters. Example: "abc;ABC"

Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"

Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are

";", ',' and backslash itself.

This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch

back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will

be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the

langmap mappings) in the following cases:

o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)

o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R

o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings

Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by

this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time

allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.

Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!

'langmenu' 'lm'LINK

'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +menu and

+multi_lang features}

Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded

from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath':

"lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"

(without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no

matter what $LANG is set to:

:set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1

When 'langmenu' is empty, v:lang is used.

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use

the English menus:

:set langmenu=none

This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype

detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting

this option has no effect. But you could do this:

:source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim

:set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1

:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim

Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!

'langnoremap' 'lnr'LINK

'langnoremap' 'lnr' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +langmap

feature}

When on, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting from

a mapping. This basically means, if you noticed that setting

'langmap' disables some of your mappings, try setting this option.

This option defaults to off for backwards compatibility. Set it on if

that works for you to avoid mappings to break.

'laststatus' 'ls'LINK

'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

The value of this option influences when the last window will have a

status line:

0: never

1: only if there are at least two windows

2: always

The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several

windows, but it takes another screen line. status-line

'lazyredraw' 'lz' 'nolazyredraw' 'nolz'LINK

'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while

executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been

typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an

update use :redraw.

'linebreak' 'lbr' 'nolinebreak' 'nolbr'LINK

'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +linebreak

feature}

If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather

than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike

'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,

it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.

If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value

of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option

is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.

Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed

with the right amount of white space.

'lines' E593LINK

'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)

global

Number of lines of the Vim window.

Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the

terminal initialization code. Also see posix-screen-size.

When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this

option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want

to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your gvimrc file.

Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can

use this command to get the tallest window possible:

:set lines=999

Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.

If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.

When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical

number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.

'linespace' 'lsp'LINK

'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)

global

{not in Vi}

{only in the GUI}

Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font

uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.

When non-zero there is room for underlining.

With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have

space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set

'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems

though!

'lisp' 'nolisp'LINK

'lisp' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not available when compiled without the +lispindent

feature}

Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for

the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with

"cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'

flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or

better. Also see 'lispwords'.

The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the

"=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than

calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.

This option is not used when 'paste' is set.

{Vi: Does it a little bit differently}

'lispwords' 'lw'LINK

'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +lispindent

feature}

Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.

'lisp'

'list' 'nolist'LINK

'list' boolean (default off)

local to window

List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of

line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for

trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option.

The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character

occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor

position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use:

:set list lcs=tab:\ \

Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'

or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for

changing the way tabs are displayed.

'listchars' 'lcs'LINK

'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")

global

{not in Vi}

Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the :list command. It is a

comma separated list of string settings.

lcs-eolLINK

eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When

omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the

line.

lcs-tabLINK

tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first

char is used once. The second char is repeated to

fill the space that the tab normally occupies.

"tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as

">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.

lcs-trailLINK

trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,

trailing spaces are blank.

lcs-extendsLINK

extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is

off and the line continues beyond the right of the

screen.

lcs-precedesLINK

precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'

is off and there is text preceding the character

visible in the first column.

lcs-concealLINK

conceal:c Character to show in place of concealed text, when

'conceallevel' is set to 1.

lcs-nbspLINK

nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character

0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted.

The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can

be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable

characters are allowed. All characters must be single width.

Examples:

:set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-

:set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%

:set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<

The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and

"precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".

hl-NonText hl-SpecialKey

'lpl' 'nolpl' 'loadplugins' 'noloadplugins'LINK

'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up load-plugins.

This option can be reset in your vimrc file to disable the loading

of plugins.

Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments

reset this option. -u --noplugin

'macatsui' 'nomacatsui'LINK

'macatsui' boolean (default on)

global

{only available in Mac GUI version}

This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set

and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When

not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when

you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may

be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method

to unset it:

if exists('&macatsui')

set nomacatsui

endif

Another option to check if you have drawing problems is

'termencoding'.

'magic' 'nomagic'LINK

'magic' boolean (default on)

global

Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.

See pattern.

NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep

this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with

old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when

'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to /\M.

'makeef' 'mef'LINK

'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

Name of the errorfile for the :make command (see :make_makeprg)

and the :grep command.

When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.

When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name

unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an

existing file.

NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'makeprg' 'mp'LINK

'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Program to use for the ":make" command. See :make_makeprg.

This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see :_% and :_#),

which are expanded to the current and alternate file name. Use ::S

to escape file names in case they contain special characters.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env. See option-backslash

about including spaces and backslashes.

Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for

the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called

"myfilter" do it like this:

:set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter

The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify

where the arguments will be included, for example:

:set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'matchpairs' 'mps'LINK

'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Characters that form pairs. The % command jumps from one to the

other.

Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot

jump between two double quotes.

The characters must be separated by a colon.

The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and

'>' (HTML):

:set mps+=<:>

A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an

assignment, useful for languages like C and Java:

:au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;

For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in

the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. add-local-help

'matchtime' 'mat'LINK

'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)

global

{not in Vi}{in Nvi}

Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is

set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that

set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.

'maxcombine' 'mco'LINK

'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying.

Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8".

The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4.

Maximum value is 6.

Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more

combining characters, you just can't see them. Use g8 or ga.

See mbyte-combining.

'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'LINK

'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +eval

feature}

Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally

catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with

more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use

more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.

See also :function.

'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' E223LINK

'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)

global

{not in Vi}

Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a

character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like

":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",

because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also

key-mapping.

'maxmem' 'mm'LINK

'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system

dependent) or half the amount of memory

available)

global

{not in Vi}

Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this

limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause

other memory to be freed. The maximum usable value is about 2000000.

Use this to work without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.

'maxmempattern' 'mmp'LINK

'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000)

global

{not in Vi}

Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.

The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit.

E363LINK

When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly

behaves like CTRL-C was typed.

Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very

inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern

"\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better.

Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit.

'maxmemtot' 'mmt'LINK

'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system

dependent) or half the amount of memory

available)

global

{not in Vi}

Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together.

The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work

without a limit. On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But

hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?

Also see 'maxmem'.

'menuitems' 'mis'LINK

'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +menu

feature}

Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are

generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this

option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.

'mkspellmem' 'msm'LINK

'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Parameters for :mkspell. This tunes when to start compressing the

word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but

it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used

per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why

this tuning is complicated.

There are three numbers, separated by commas:

{start},{inc},{added}

For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start}

gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any

compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of

memory that is available to Vim.

When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the

amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another

compression is done. A low number means compression is done after

less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory

will be allocated.

After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before

the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra

amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller

chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's

slower.

The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and

Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If

you have 1 Gbyte you could use:

:set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800

If you have less than 512 Mbyte :mkspell may fail for some

languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.

'modeline' 'ml' 'nomodeline' 'noml'LINK

'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root),

Vi default: off)

local to buffer

'modelines' 'mls'LINK

'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)

global

{not in Vi}

If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is

checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero

no lines are checked. See modeline.

NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'modifiable' 'ma' 'nomodifiable' 'noma'LINK

'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)

local to buffer

{not in Vi} E21LINK

When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and

'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.

Can be reset with the -M command line argument.

'modified' 'mod' 'nomodified' 'nomod'LINK

'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set

when:

1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the

undo command to go back to the original text will reset the

option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the

buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from

when it was written.

2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original

value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or

written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original

values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be

reset.

This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the

result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,

FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event. See gzip-example for

an explanation.

When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but

will be ignored.

'more' 'nomore'LINK

'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get

the more-prompt. When this option is off there are no pauses, the

listing continues until finished.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'mouse' E538LINK

'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)

global

{not in Vi}

Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals

(xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 win32-mouse, QNX pterm, *BSD console with

sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the

GUI, see gui-mouse.

The mouse can be enabled for different modes:

n Normal mode

v Visual mode

i Insert mode

c Command-line mode

h all previous modes when editing a help file

a all previous modes

r for hit-enter and more-prompt prompt

Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with:

:set mouse=a

When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for

modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.

See mouse-using. Also see 'clipboard'.

Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the

"* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of

the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.

Also see the 'clipboard' option.

'mousefocus' 'mousef' 'nomousefocus' 'nomousef'LINK

'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only works in the GUI}

The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.

When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the

mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the

default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as

a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.

'mousehide' 'mh' 'nomousehide' 'nomh'LINK

'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

{only works in the GUI}

When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.

The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.

'mousemodel' 'mousem'LINK

'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)

global

{not in Vi}

Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what

the right mouse button is used for:

extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works

like in an xterm.

popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left

mouse button extends a selection. This works like

with Microsoft Windows.

popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the

position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the

selected operation will act upon the clicked object.

If clicking inside a selection, that selection will

be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of

course, that right clicking outside a selection will

end Visual mode.

Overview of what button does what for each model:

mouse extend popup(_setpos)

left click place cursor place cursor

left drag start selection start selection

shift-left search word extend selection

right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)

right drag extend selection -

middle click paste paste

In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.

You need to define this first, see popup-menu.

Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.

See gui-mouse-mapping. But mappings are NOT used for modeless

selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).

The 'mousemodel' option is set by the :behave command.

'mouseshape' 'mouses' E547LINK

'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,

m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +mouseshape

feature}

This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in

different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much

like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list

and an argument-list:

mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..

The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:

In a normal window:

n Normal mode

v Visual mode

ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',

if not specified)

o Operator-pending mode

i Insert mode

r Replace mode

Others:

c appending to the command-line

ci inserting in the command-line

cr replacing in the command-line

m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts

ml idem, but cursor in the last line

e any mode, pointer below last window

s any mode, pointer on a status line

sd any mode, while dragging a status line

vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line

vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line

a everywhere

The shape is one of the following:

avail name looks like

w x arrow Normal mouse pointer

w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)

w x beam I-beam

w x updown up-down sizing arrows

w x leftright left-right sizing arrows

w x busy The system's usual busy pointer

w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer

x udsizing indicates up-down resizing

x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing

x crosshair like a big thin +

x hand1 black hand

x hand2 white hand

x pencil what you write with

x question big ?

x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up

w x up-arrow arrow pointing up

x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)

The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,

x for X11.

Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse

pointer.

Example:

:set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no

will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and

indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since

clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)

'mousetime' 'mouset'LINK

'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)

global

{not in Vi}

Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum

time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be

recognized as a multi click.

'mzquantum' 'mzq'LINK

'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +mzscheme

feature}

The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.

Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.

'nrformats' 'nf'LINK

'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the

CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number

respectively; see CTRL-A for more info on these commands.

alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be

incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a

letter index a), b), etc. octal-nrformatsLINK

octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered

to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".

hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be

considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on

"0x100" results in "0x0ff".

Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always

considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not

recognized as octal or hex.

'number' 'nu' 'nonumber' 'nonu'LINK

'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)

local to window

Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is

excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of

line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).

The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line

number.

When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'

characters are put before the number.

See hl-LineNr and hl-CursorLineNr for the highlighting used for

the number.

number_relativenumberLINK

The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be

relative to the cursor. Together with 'number' there are these

four combinations (cursor in line 3):

'nonu' 'nu' 'nonu' 'nu'

'nornu' 'nornu' 'rnu' 'rnu'

|apple | 1 apple | 2 apple | 2 apple

|pear | 2 pear | 1 pear | 1 pear

|nobody | 3 nobody | 0 nobody |3 nobody

|there | 4 there | 1 there | 1 there

'numberwidth' 'nuw'LINK

'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +linebreak

feature}

Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant

when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines

with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and

the text, there is one less character for the number itself.

The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to

fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of

rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'

is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number

up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used.

The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.

NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.

'omnifunc' 'ofu'LINK

'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +eval

or +insert_expand features}

This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni

completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O

See complete-functions for an explanation of how the function is

invoked and what it should return.

This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:

:filetype-plugin-on

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'opendevice' 'odev' 'noopendevice' 'noodev'LINK

'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}

Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a

device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore

it is off by default.

Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also

result in editing a device.

'operatorfunc' 'opfunc'LINK

'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty)

global

{not in Vi}

This option specifies a function to be called by the g@ operator.

See :map-operator for more info and an example.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'osfiletype' 'oft'LINK

'osfiletype' 'oft' string (default: "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed.

'paragraphs' 'para'LINK

'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp")

global

Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs

of two letters (see object-motions).

'paste' 'nopaste'LINK

'paste' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy

some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid

unexpected effects.

Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim

cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim

knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'

being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the

mouse clicks itself.

This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in

your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting

'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button

will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping.

When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):

- mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled

- abbreviations are disabled

- 'textwidth' is set to 0

- 'wrapmargin' is set to 0

- 'autoindent' is reset

- 'smartindent' is reset

- 'softtabstop' is set to 0

- 'revins' is reset

- 'ruler' is reset

- 'showmatch' is reset

- 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty

These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:

- 'lisp'

- 'indentexpr'

- 'cindent'

NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is

on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the

settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to

set the 'paste' option again.

When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to

the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.

Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.

Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use

the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.

'pastetoggle' 'pt'LINK

'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'

option. This is like specifying a mapping:

:map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>

Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.

The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.

'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in

Command-line mode.

Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,

when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do

this:

:map <F10> :set paste<CR>

:map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>

:imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>

:imap <F11> <nop>

:set pastetoggle=<F11>

This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.

Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste

mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key

sequence.

When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies.

'pex' 'patchexpr'LINK

'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +diff

feature}

Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate

the resulting new version of the file. See diff-patchexpr.

'patchmode' 'pm' E205 E206LINK

'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used

to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a

source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a

copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the

name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option

appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like

".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The

backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has

been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a

backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is

created.

When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.

Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the

end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always

recognized as a compressed file.

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

'path' 'pa' E343 E345 E347 E854LINK

'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"

on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"

other systems: ".,,")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the

gf, [f, ]f, ^Wf, :find, :sfind, :tabfind and other commands,

provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not

starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path'

option may be relative or absolute.

- Use commas to separate directory names:

:set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include

- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards

compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory

name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space:

:set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space

- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra

backslash:

:set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma

- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use:

:set path=.

- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two

commas:

:set path=,,

- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.

- Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

- When using netrw.vim URLs can be used. For example, adding

"http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.

- Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and

";". See file-searching for info and syntax.

{not available when compiled without the +path_extra feature}

- Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option:

:set path=.,c:\\include

Or just use '/' instead:

:set path=.,c:/include

Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as

the file!

The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly

it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.

You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of

'path', see :checkpath.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default. To remove the current directory use:

:set path-=

To add the current directory use:

:set path+=

To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the

separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory

names are separated with a semi-colon:

:let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')

Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that

this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.

'preserveindent' 'pi' 'nopreserveindent' 'nopi'LINK

'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the

indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a

series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless 'expandtab' is

enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option

means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible

for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.

'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains

a Tab.

NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of

tabs and spaces. You might not like this.

NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.

Also see 'copyindent'.

Use :retab to clean up white space.

'previewheight' 'pvh'LINK

'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows or

+quickfix features}

Default height for a preview window. Used for :ptag and associated

commands. Used for CTRL-W_} when no count is given.

'previewwindow' 'nopreviewwindow'LINK

'pvw' 'nopvw' E590LINK

'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows or

+quickfix features}

Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option

set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands

:ptag, :pedit, etc.

'printdevice' 'pdev'LINK

'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer

feature}

The name of the printer to be used for :hardcopy.

See pdev-option.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'printencoding' 'penc'LINK

'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer

and +postscript features}

Sets the character encoding used when printing.

See penc-option.

'printexpr' 'pexpr'LINK

'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer

and +postscript features}

Expression used to print the PostScript produced with :hardcopy.

See pexpr-option.

'printfont' 'pfn'LINK

'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer

feature}

The name of the font that will be used for :hardcopy.

See pfn-option.

'printheader' 'pheader'LINK

'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer

feature}

The format of the header produced in :hardcopy output.

See pheader-option.

'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs'LINK

'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer,

+postscript and +multi_byte features}

The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from :hardcopy.

See pmbcs-option.

'printmbfont' 'pmbfn'LINK

'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +printer,

+postscript and +multi_byte features}

List of font names to be used for CJK output from :hardcopy.

See pmbfn-option.

'printoptions' 'popt'LINK

'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with +printer feature}

List of items that control the format of the output of :hardcopy.

See popt-option.

'prompt' 'noprompt'LINK

'prompt' boolean (default on)

global

When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode.

'pumheight' 'ph'LINK

'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0)

global

{not available when compiled without the

+insert_expand feature}

{not in Vi}

Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for

Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used.

ins-completion-menu.

'quoteescape' 'qe'LINK

'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for

objects like a', a" and a` a'.

When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,

the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the

text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.

'readonly' 'ro' 'noreadonly' 'noro'LINK

'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from

accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started

in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".

When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current

buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.

{not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is

set for the newly edited buffer.

'redrawtime' 'rdt'LINK

'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +reltime

feature}

The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to

searching for patterns for 'hlsearch' and :match highlighting.

When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further

matches will be highlighted. This is used to avoid that Vim hangs

when using a very complicated pattern.

'regexpengine' 're'LINK

'regexpengine' 're' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi}

This selects the default regexp engine. two-engines

The possible values are:

0 automatic selection

1 old engine

2 NFA engine

Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something

that is not supported the pattern will not match. This is only useful

for debugging the regexp engine.

Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the

default engine becomes too costly. E.g., when the NFA engine uses too

many states. This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of

a complex pattern with long text.

'relativenumber' 'rnu' 'norelativenumber' 'nornu'LINK

'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of

each line. Relative line numbers help you use the count you can

precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without

having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with

other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).

When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped

line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when

'compatible' isn't set).

The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line

number.

When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'

characters are put before the number.

See hl-LineNr and hl-CursorLineNr for the highlighting used for

the number.

The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of

'number', see number_relativenumber for all combinations of the two

options.

'remap' 'noremap'LINK

'remap' boolean (default on)

global

Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for

a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.

NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep

this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with

old Vi scripts.

'renderoptions' 'rop'LINK

'renderoptions' 'rop' string (default: empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with GUI and DIRECTX on

MS-Windows}

Select a text renderer and set its options. The options depend on the

renderer.

Syntax:

set rop=type:{renderer}(,{name}:{value})*

Currently, only one optional renderer is available.

render behavior

directx Vim will draw text using DirectX (DirectWrite). It makes

drawn glyphs more beautiful than default GDI.

It requires 'encoding' is "utf-8", and only works on

MS-Windows Vista or newer version.

Options:

name meaning type value

gamma gamma float 1.0 - 2.2 (maybe)

contrast enhancedContrast float (unknown)

level clearTypeLevel float (unknown)

geom pixelGeometry int 0 - 2 (see below)

renmode renderingMode int 0 - 6 (see below)

taamode textAntialiasMode int 0 - 3 (see below)

See this URL for detail:

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx

For geom: structure of a device pixel.

0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT

1 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_RGB

2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR

See this URL for detail:

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx

For renmode: method of rendering glyphs.

0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT

1 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_ALIASED

2 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_CLASSIC

3 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_NATURAL

4 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL

5 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL_SYMMETRIC

6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE

See this URL for detail:

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx

For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text.

0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT

1 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_CLEARTYPE

2 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_GRAYSCALE

3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED

See this URL for detail:

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx

Example:

set encoding=utf-8

set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12:cSHIFTJIS

set rop=type:directx

If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys) to

'guifont', it fallbacks to be drawn by GDI automatically.

Other render types are currently not supported.

'report'LINK

'report' number (default 2)

global

Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of

changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most

":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.

For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used

instead of the number of lines.

'restorescreen' 'rs' 'norestorescreen' 'nors'LINK

'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version}

When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also

happens when executing external commands.

For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'

options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:

set t_ti= t_te=

To enable restoring (for an xterm):

set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8

(Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)

'revins' 'ri' 'norevins' 'nori'LINK

'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing

backwards" ins-reverse. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_

command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.

'rightleft' 'rl' 'norightleft' 'norl'LINK

'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters

that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.

Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that

are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.

This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files

simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is

useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left

and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly

in different windows). Also see rileft.txt.

'rightleftcmd' 'rlc'LINK

'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")

local to window

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +rightleft

feature}

Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in

right-to-left mode for a group of commands:

search "/" and "?" commands

This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.

The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.

'ruler' 'ru' 'noruler' 'noru'LINK

'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+cmdline_info feature}

Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a

comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed

text in the file is shown on the far right:

Top first line is visible

Bot last line is visible

All first and last line are visible

45% relative position in the file

If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.

Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the

ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the

screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty),

this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'

If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of

bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both

the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,

separated with a dash.

For an empty line "0-1" is shown.

For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".

This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.

If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where

you are, use "g CTRL-G" g_CTRL-G.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'rulerformat' 'ruf'LINK

'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +statusline

feature}

When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler

string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.

The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.

The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15

characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.

Example:

:set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)

'runtimepath' 'rtp' vimfilesLINK

'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:

Unix: "$HOME/.vim,

$VIM/vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

$VIM/vimfiles/after,

$HOME/.vim/after"

Amiga: "home:vimfiles,

$VIM/vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

$VIM/vimfiles/after,

home:vimfiles/after"

PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,

$VIM/vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

$VIM/vimfiles/after,

$HOME/vimfiles/after"

Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

$VIM:vimfiles:after"

RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

Choices:vimfiles/after"

VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,

$VIM/vimfiles,

$VIMRUNTIME,

$VIM/vimfiles/after,

sys$login:vimfiles/after")

global

{not in Vi}

This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime

files:

filetype.vim filetypes by file name new-filetype

scripts.vim filetypes by file contents new-filetype-scripts

autoload/ automatically loaded scripts autoload-functions

colors/ color scheme files :colorscheme

compiler/ compiler files :compiler

doc/ documentation write-local-help

ftplugin/ filetype plugins write-filetype-plugin

indent/ indent scripts indent-expression

keymap/ key mapping files mbyte-keymap

lang/ menu translations :menutrans

menu.vim GUI menus menu.vim

plugin/ plugin scripts write-plugin

print/ files for printing postscript-print-encoding

spell/ spell checking files spell

syntax/ syntax files mysyntaxfile

tutor/ files for vimtutor tutor

And any other file searched for with the :runtime command.

The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:

1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.

2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system

administrator.

3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.

after-directoryLINK

4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is

for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed

defaults (rarely needed)

5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for

personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults

or system-wide settings (rarely needed).

Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal

wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for

runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid

wildcards.

See :runtime.

Example:

:set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME

This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your

personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a

group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime

files).

You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the

distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME

to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put

a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed

runtime files.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'scroll' 'scr'LINK

'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)

local to window

Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be

set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size

changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will

be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window

height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives

the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference

when lines wrap}

'scrollbind' 'scb' 'noscrollbind' 'noscb'LINK

'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +scrollbind

feature}

See also scroll-binding. When this option is set, the current

window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have

this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the

differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.

See 'scrollopt' for options that determine how this option should be

interpreted.

This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another

file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows

with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.

'scrolljump' 'sj'LINK

'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the

screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,

CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.

When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the

percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window

height.

NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.

'scrolloff' 'so'LINK

'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi}

Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.

This will make some context visible around where you are working. If

you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be

in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or

when long lines wrap).

For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.

NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

'scrollopt' 'sbo'LINK

'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")

global

{not available when compiled without the +scrollbind

feature}

{not in Vi}

This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how

'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind

Options.

The following words are available:

ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows

hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows

jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical

scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first

displayed line of the bound windows. When moving

around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may

reach a position before the start or after the end of

the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when

moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll

to the desired position when possible.

When now making that window the current one, two

things can be done with the relative offset:

1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is

adjusted for the scroll position in the new current

window. When going back to the other window, the

new relative offset will be used.

2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are

scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When

going back to the other window, it still uses the

same relative offset.

Also see scroll-binding.

When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,

even when "ver" isn't there.

'sections' 'sect'LINK

'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")

global

Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of

two letters (See object-motions). The default makes a section start

at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".

'secure' 'nosecure' E523LINK

'secure' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in

".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are

displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into

problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is

only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be

dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set

'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'selection' 'sel'LINK

'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")

global

{not in Vi}

This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used

in Visual and Select mode.

Possible values:

value past line inclusive

old no yes

inclusive yes yes

exclusive yes no

"past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one

character past the line.

"inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included

in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the

selection.

Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end

backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when

starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.

The 'selection' option is set by the :behave command.

'selectmode' 'slm'LINK

'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start

Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.

Possible values:

mouse when using the mouse

key when using shifted special keys

cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V

See Select-mode.

The 'selectmode' option is set by the :behave command.

'sessionoptions' 'ssop'LINK

'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,

help,options,tabpages,winsize")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +mksession

feature}

Changes the effect of the :mksession command. It is a comma

separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring

something:

word save and restore

blank empty windows

buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows

curdir the current directory

folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local

fold options

globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter

and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only

String and Number types are stored.

help the help window

localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not

global values for local options)

options all options and mappings (also global values for local

options)

resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'

sesdir the directory in which the session file is located

will become the current directory (useful with

projects accessed over a network from different

systems)

slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward

slashes

tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page

is restored, so that you can make a session for each

tab page separately

unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when

on Windows or DOS

winpos position of the whole Vim window

winsize window sizes

Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".

When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored

with absolute paths.

"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files

with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,

but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.

'shell' 'sh' E91LINK

'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",

MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or

"cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")

global

Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the

value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'

'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.

It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose

it in quotes. Example:

:set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f

Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and

each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the

"-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command

name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path

separators.

For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment

variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the

libc.inf file of DJGPP.

Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be

included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"

works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,

filtering).

For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is

changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this:

:set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'LINK

'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c";

MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not

contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")

global

{not in Vi}

Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,

"bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like

systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to

reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for

OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).

On Unix it can have more than one flag. Each white space separated

part is passed as an argument to the shell command.

See option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes.

Also see dos-shell for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shellpipe' 'sp'LINK

'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +quickfix

feature}

String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the

error file. See also :make_makeprg. See option-backslash about

including spaces and backslashes.

The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary

(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value

of this option).

For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly

saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.

For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved

in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or

"tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the

'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the

default becomes "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.

Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses

"sh".

The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"

and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set

there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was

explicitly set before.

When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the

":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'

that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do

want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.

Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".

In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will

become obsolete (at least for Unix).

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shellquote' 'shq'LINK

'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'

contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")

global

{not in Vi}

Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for

the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the

quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's

probably not useful to set both options.

This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for

third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell

or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according

the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the

user. See dos-shell.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shellredir' 'srr'LINK

'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")

global

{not in Vi}

String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary

file. See also :!. See option-backslash about including spaces

and backslashes.

The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary

(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value

of this option).

The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"

or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the

'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes

">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.

For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked

for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with

".exe" appended are checked for.

The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"

and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set

there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was

explicitly set before.

In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will

become obsolete (at least for Unix).

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shellslash' 'ssl' 'noshellslash' 'nossl'LINK

'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}

When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is

useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or

cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to

forward slashes by Vim.

Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some

existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening

any file for best results. This might change in the future.

'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path

separator. To test if this is so use:

if exists('+shellslash')

'shelltemp' 'stmp' 'noshelltemp' 'nostmp'LINK

'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe.

When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.

Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and

later. You can check it with:

:if has("filterpipe")

The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file

and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.

The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding

can be detected.

The FilterReadPre, FilterReadPost and FilterWritePre,

FilterWritePost autocommands event are not triggered when

'shelltemp' is off.

'shelltype' 'st'LINK

'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}

On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work

which use a shell.

0 and 1: always use the shell

2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines

4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command

When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.

0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands

1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands

'shellxescape' 'sxe'LINK

'shellxescape' 'sxe' string (default: "";

for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^")

global

{not in Vi}

When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this

option will be escaped with a '^' character. This makes it possible

to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.

'shellxquote' 'sxq'LINK

'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";

for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "("

for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"

somewhere: "\""

for Unix, when using system(): "\"")

global

{not in Vi}

Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for

the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See

'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful

to set both options.

When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"('

then ')"' is appended.

When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.

This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be

useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically

strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells

such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The

default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need

to set this option by the user. See dos-shell.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'shiftround' 'sr' 'noshiftround' 'nosr'LINK

'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <

commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to

a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'shiftwidth' 'sw'LINK

'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)

local to buffer

Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for

'cindent', >>, <<, etc.

When zero the 'ts' value will be used. Use the shiftwidth()

function to get the effective shiftwidth value.

'shortmess' 'shm'LINK

'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",

POSIX default: "A")

global

{not in Vi}

This option helps to avoid all the hit-enter prompts caused by file

messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.

It is a list of flags:

flag meaning when present

f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"

i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"

l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"

m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"

n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"

r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"

w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message

and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command

x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of

"[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".

a all of the above abbreviations

o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message

for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)

O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.

Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").

s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search

hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages

t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit

on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.

Ignored in Ex mode.

T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to

fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.

Ignored in Ex mode.

W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file

A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file

is found.

I don't give the intro message when starting Vim :intro.

c don't give ins-completion-menu messages. For example,

"-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match",

"Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.

This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers

requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as

possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you

would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"

Useful values:

shm= No abbreviation of message.

shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.

shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'shortname' 'sn' 'noshortname' 'nosn'LINK

'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}

Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3

characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this

option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when

adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available

for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful

when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos

or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this

option is always on by default.

'showbreak' 'sbr' E595LINK

'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +linebreak

feature}

String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful

values are "> " or "+++ ":

:set showbreak=>\

Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like

this:

:let &showbreak = '+++ '

Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and

comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the

part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).

The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in

'highlight'.

Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.

If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the

"n" flag to 'cpoptions'.

'showcmd' 'sc' 'noshowcmd' 'nosc'LINK

'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:

off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+cmdline_info feature}

Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this

option off if your terminal is slow.

In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:

- When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.

If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"

means two characters and six bytes.

- When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.

- When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:

{lines}x{columns}.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'showfulltag' 'sft' 'noshowfulltag' 'nosft'LINK

'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When completing a word in insert mode (see ins-completion) from the

tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search

pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have

matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are

required (coding style permitting).

Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in

'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not

match the typed text.

'showmatch' 'sm' 'noshowmatch' 'nosm'LINK

'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)

global

When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The

jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to

show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.

A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be

seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.

When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character

will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.

See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and

blinking when showing the match.

The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show

matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite

matches.

Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving

around pi_paren.txt.

Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.

'showmode' 'smd' 'noshowmode' 'nosmd'LINK

'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)

global

If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.

Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for

this message.

When XIM may be used the message will include "XIM". But this

doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is

not set.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'showtabline' 'stal'LINK

'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels

will be displayed:

0: never

1: only if there are at least two tab pages

2: always

This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages

line.

See tab-page for more information about tab pages.

'sidescroll' 'ss'LINK

'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi}

The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when

the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.

When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.

When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using

a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl"

commands.

'sidescrolloff' 'siso'LINK

'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi}

The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the

right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a

value greater than 0 while having 'sidescroll' also at a non-zero

value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in

horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option

to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor

horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too

close to the beginning of the line.

NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as

in the following example to never allow the cursor to move

onto the "extends" character:

:set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<

:set sidescrolloff=1

'smartcase' 'scs' 'nosmartcase' 'noscs'LINK

'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper

case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and

'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",

":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc. After

"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,

recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'smartindent' 'si' 'nosmartindent' 'nosi'LINK

'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+smartindent feature}

Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like

programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does

something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,

see C-indenting. When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,

setting 'si' has no effect. 'indentexpr' is a more advanced

alternative.

Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.

An indent is automatically inserted:

- After a line ending in '{'.

- After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.

- Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).

When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is

given the same indent as the matching '{'.

When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for

that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent

is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this

mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.

When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted

right.

NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'

is set smart indenting is disabled.

'smarttab' 'sta' 'nosmarttab' 'nosta'LINK

'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to

'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A

<BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the

line.

When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or

'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or

right shift-left-right.

What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'

option. Also see ins-expandtab. When 'expandtab' is not set, the

number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'softtabstop' 'sts'LINK

'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing

operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like

<Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is

used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value

of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,

commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.

When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.

When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.

'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.

See also ins-expandtab. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of

spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.

The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is

set.

NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

'spell' 'nospell'LINK

'spell' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

When on spell checking will be done. See spell.

The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.

'spellcapcheck' 'spc'LINK

'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be

checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted

with SpellCap hl-SpellCap (unless the word is also badly spelled).

When this check is not wanted make this option empty.

Only used when 'spell' is set.

Be careful with special characters, see option-backslash about

including spaces and backslashes.

To set this option automatically depending on the language, see

set-spc-auto.

'spellfile' 'spf'LINK

'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Name of the word list file where words are added for the zg and zw

commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the

path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.

E765LINK

It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the

zg and zw commands can be used to access each. This allows using

a personal word list file and a project word list file.

When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for

you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If

there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file

name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used,

ignoring the region.

The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not

have to appear in 'spelllang'.

Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region

name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when

'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files

without region name will be found.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'spelllang' 'spl'LINK

'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is

on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example:

set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical

This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words

that are not recognized will be highlighted.

The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is

recommended to separate the two letter language name from a

specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.

A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is

the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one

region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian

English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great

Britain.

If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from

spell checking. This is useful when editing text that also has Asian

words.

E757LINK

As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The

first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name

(_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).

This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct

encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.

When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good

idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the

files twice.

How the related spell files are found is explained here: spell-load.

If the spellfile.vim plugin is active and you use a language name

for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin

will ask you if you want to download the file.

After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files

"spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'

up to the first comma, dot or underscore.

Also see set-spc-auto.

'spellsuggest' 'sps'LINK

'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the z= command and

the spellsuggest() function. This is a comma-separated list of

items:

best Internal method that works best for English. Finds

changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like

scoring to improve the ordering.

double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the

results. The first method is "fast", the other method

computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad

word. That only works when the language specifies

sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give

better results.

fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes:

character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for

simple typing mistakes.

{number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for z=.

Not used for spellsuggest(). The number of

suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'

minus two.

file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,

separated by a slash. The first column contains the

bad word, the second column the suggested good word.

Example:

theribal/terrible

Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the

top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.

Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for

comments.

The word in the second column must be correct,

otherwise it will not be used. Add the word to an

".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling

mistake.

The file is used for all languages.

expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid

trouble with spaces. v:val holds the badly spelled

word. The expression must evaluate to a List of

Lists, each with a suggestion and a score.

Example:

[['the', 33], ['that', 44]]

Set 'verbose' and use z= to see the scores that the

internal methods use. A lower score is better.

This may invoke spellsuggest() if you temporarily

set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.

Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the

'verbose' option to a non-zero value.

Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may

appear several times in any order. Example:

:set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'splitbelow' 'sb' 'nosplitbelow' 'nosb'LINK

'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current

one. :split

'splitright' 'spr' 'nosplitright' 'nospr'LINK

'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the

current one. :vsplit

'startofline' 'sol' 'nostartofline' 'nosol'LINK

'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first

non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column

(if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,

CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"

with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing

commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that

only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".

In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column

where it was the last time the buffer was edited.

NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.

'statusline' 'stl' E540 E542LINK

'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)

global or local to window global-local

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +statusline

feature}

When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.

Also see status-line.

The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with

normal text. Each status line item is of the form:

%-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}

All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can

be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. E541LINK

When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,

evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example:

:set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()

The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.

Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the

current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the

context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made

empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop.

Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and

'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of CTRL-G.

field meaning

- Left justify the item. The default is right justified

when minwid is larger than the length of the item.

0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.

minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.

Value must be 50 or less.

maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'

on the left for text items. Numeric items will be

shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number

where number is the amount of missing digits, much like

an exponential notation.

item A one letter code as described below.

Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The

second character in "item" is the type:

N for number

S for string

F for flags as described below

- not applicable

item meaning

f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current

directory.

F S Full path to the file in the buffer.

t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.

m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.

M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".

r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".

R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".

h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".

H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".

w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".

W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".

y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'.

Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.

{not available when compiled without +autocmd feature}

q S "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.

k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when :lmap mappings are

being used: "<keymap>"

n N Buffer number.

b N Value of character under cursor.

B N As above, in hexadecimal.

o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.

Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)

{not available when compiled without +byte_offset feature}

O N As above, in hexadecimal.

N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)

l N Line number.

L N Number of lines in buffer.

c N Column number.

v N Virtual column number.

V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.

p N Percentage through file in lines as in CTRL-G.

P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the

percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length, unless

translated.

a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})

Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.

{ NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result.

Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'.

( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and

alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.

) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.

T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last

label. This information is used for mouse clicks.

X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the

label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab"

mark. This information is used for mouse clicks.

< - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.

No width fields allowed.

= - Separation point between left and right aligned items.

No width fields allowed.

# - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again.

Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same

highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current

windows.

* - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the

minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.

The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied

to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.

The number N must be between 1 and 9. See hl-User1..9

When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when

that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display

when flags are used like in the examples below.

When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are

not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will

become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear

completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set.

:set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...

Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status

line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set

temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is

currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.

The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the

real current buffer.

The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the sandbox if set from

a modeline, see sandbox-option.

It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while

evaluating 'statusline' textlock.

If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting

a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by

setting an option without changing its value. Example:

:let &ro = &ro

A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.

Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules

described above.

Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable!

If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and

edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.

Examples:

Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set

:set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P

Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga")

:set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P

Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red.

:set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'

:hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red

Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded

:set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...

In the :autocmd's:

:let b:gzflag = 1

And:

:unlet b:gzflag

And define this function:

:function VarExists(var, val)

: if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif

:endfunction

'suffixes' 'su'LINK

'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")

global

{not in Vi}

Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files

match a wildcard. See suffixes. Commas can be used to separate the

suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as

the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a

separator, precede it with a backslash (see option-backslash about

including spaces and backslashes).

See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

'suffixesadd' 'sua'LINK

'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+file_in_path feature}

Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a

file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example:

:set suffixesadd=.java

'swapfile' 'swf' 'noswapfile' 'noswf'LINK

'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a

swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with

confidential information that even root must not be able to access.

Careful: All text will be in memory:

- Don't use this for big files.

- Recovery will be impossible!

A swapfile will only be present when 'updatecount' is non-zero and

'swapfile' is set.

When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is

immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is

non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.

Also see swap-file and 'swapsync'.

If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,

use the :noswapfile modifier.

This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to

specify special kinds of buffers. See special-buffers.

'swapsync' 'sws'LINK

'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")

global

{not in Vi}

When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after

writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.

When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and

not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.

On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,

so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some

systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system

setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default

fsync(), which may work better on some systems.

The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.

'switchbuf' 'swb'LINK

'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.

Possible values (comma separated list):

useopen If included, jump to the first open window that

contains the specified buffer (if there is one).

Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.

This setting is checked with quickfix commands, when

jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is

also used in all buffer related split commands, for

example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".

usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab

pages.

split If included, split the current window before loading

a buffer for a quickfix command that display errors.

Otherwise: do not split, use current window.

newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules

"split" when both are present.

'synmaxcol' 'smc'LINK

'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the

text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not

be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.

This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one

long line.

Set to zero to remove the limit.

'syntax' 'syn'LINK

'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +syntax

feature}

When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless

syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".

Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the

b:current_syntax variable does).

This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is

not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file:

/* vim: set syntax=idl : */

When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype

names. Example:

/* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */

This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.

Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,

otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear.

To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use:

:set syntax=OFF

To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the

'filetype' option:

:set syntax=ON

What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the

Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.

This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or

'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.

Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

'tabline' 'tal'LINK

'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages

line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default

tab pages line. See setting-tabline for more info.

The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'

option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in

'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used

instead. Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.

The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use

tabpagenr(), tabpagewinnr() and tabpagebuflist() to figure out

the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for

the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels.

Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others

are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.

'tabpagemax' 'tpm'LINK

'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the -p command line

argument or the ":tab all" command. tabpage

'tabstop' 'ts'LINK

'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)

local to buffer

Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see

:retab command, and 'softtabstop' option.

Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file

appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).

There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:

1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4

(or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim

will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will

behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.

2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use

'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The

formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.

3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a

modeline to set these values when editing the file again. Only

works when using Vim to edit the file.

4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and

'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)

for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have

tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this

though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is

changed.

'tagbsearch' 'tbs' 'notagbsearch' 'notbs'LINK

'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When searching for a tag (e.g., for the :ta command), Vim can either

use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary

searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search

will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.

Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that

they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the

'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.

When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags

files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for

certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When

'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.

Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line

at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted:

!_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/

[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]

When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the

files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used

instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.

Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only

be found in the retry.

If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,

linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value

of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be

case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in

the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version

5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used

for this as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this

to work.

When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match

exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags

files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.

When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on

ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above

must be included in the tags file.

This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,

command-line completion and ":help").

{Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}

'taglength' 'tl'LINK

'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)

global

If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.

'tagrelative' 'tr' 'notagrelative' 'notr'LINK

'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)

global

{not in Vi}

If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that

tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'tags' 'tag' E433LINK

'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with

+emacs_tags: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")

global or local to buffer global-local

Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To

include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash

(see option-backslash about including spaces and backslashes).

When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path

of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in

'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded :set_env. Also see

tags-option.

"*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in

a directory tree. See file-searching. E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will

find all files named "tags" below "/lib". The filename itself cannot

contain wildcards, it is used as-is. E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find

files called "tags?". {not available when compiled without the

+path_extra feature}

The tagfiles() function can be used to get a list of the file names

actually used.

If Vim was compiled with the +emacs_tags feature, Emacs-style tag

files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The

default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case

differences are ignored (MS-Windows). emacs-tags

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

{Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}

'tagstack' 'tgst' 'notagstack' 'notgst'LINK

'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)

global

{not in all versions of Vi}

When on, the tagstack is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or

":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the

tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or

any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified

tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.

Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a

mapping which should not change the tagstack.

'term' E529 E530 E531LINK

'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:

in the GUI: "builtin_gui"

on Amiga: "amiga"

on BeOS: "beos-ansi"

on Mac: "mac-ansi"

on MiNT: "vt52"

on MS-DOS: "pcterm"

on OS/2: "os2ansi"

on Unix: "ansi"

on VMS: "ansi"

on Win 32: "win32")

global

Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control

characters. Environment variables are expanded :set_env.

For example:

:set term=$TERM

See termcap.

'termbidi' 'tbidi'LINK

'notermbidi' 'notbidi'LINK

'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +arabic

feature}

The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified

by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping

that some languages (such as Arabic) require.

Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when

'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.

Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that

'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.

This option is reset when the GUI is started.

For further details see arabic.txt.

'termencoding' 'tenc'LINK

'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with

Macintosh GUI: "macroman")

global

{only available when compiled with the +multi_byte

feature}

{not in Vi}

Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character

encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For

the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ( 'encoding' is used for the

display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then

'termencoding' should be "macroman".

In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage

when it differs from the ANSI codepage.

E617LINK

Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been

successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".

Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error

message is shown.

For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,

because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.

When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.

This is the normal value.

Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See

encoding-table.

The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or

iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you

will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.

Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and

want to edit a UTF-8 file:

:let &termencoding = &encoding

:set encoding=utf-8

You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.

'terse' 'noterse'LINK

'terse' boolean (default off)

global

When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message

for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being

displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi

shortens a lot of messages}

'textauto' 'ta' 'notextauto' 'nota'LINK

'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)

global

{not in Vi}

This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.

For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is

set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is

reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'textmode' 'tx' 'notextmode' 'notx'LINK

'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,

others: default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.

For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is

set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to

"unix".

'textwidth' 'tw'LINK

'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be

broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables

this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When

'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also

'formatoptions' and ins-textwidth.

When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.

NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

'thesaurus' 'tsr'LINK

'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words

for thesaurus completion commands i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T. Each line in

the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by

non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line

length is 510 bytes.

To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site:

ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/ First get the README file.

To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces

after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file

name. See option-backslash about using backslashes.

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

'tildeop' 'top' 'notildeop' 'notop'LINK

'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.

NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'timeout' 'to' 'notimeout' 'noto'LINK

'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)

global

'ttimeout' 'nottimeout'LINK

'ttimeout' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

These two options together determine the behavior when part of a

mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:

'timeout' 'ttimeout' action

off off do not time out

on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes

off on time out on key codes

If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete

mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there

is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For

example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next

character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.

When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for

the next character to arrive. After that the already received

characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can

be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.

On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause

malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits

forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start

with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have

problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key

sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and

reset the 'timeout' option.

NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.

'timeoutlen' 'tm'LINK

'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)

global

{not in all versions of Vi}

'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm'LINK

'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)

global

{not in Vi}

The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key

sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G

when part of a command has been typed.

Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a

different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to

a non-negative number.

ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay

< 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'

>= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'

The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options

tell so. A useful setting would be

:set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100

(time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after

a tenth of a second).

'title' 'notitle'LINK

'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +title

feature}

When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of

'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:

filename [+=-] (path) - VIM

Where:

filename the name of the file being edited

- indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off

+ indicates the file was modified

= indicates the file is read-only

=+ indicates the file is read-only and modified

(path) is the path of the file being edited

- VIM the server name v:servername or "VIM"

Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles

(currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and

terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and

iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).

X11LINK

When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will

be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"

when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also

works for the icon name 'icon'.

But: When Vim was started with the -X argument, restoring the title

will not work (except in the GUI).

If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.

You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.

When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:

rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &

then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the

title of the window should change back to what it should be after

exiting Vim.

'titlelen'LINK

'titlelen' number (default 85)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +title

feature}

Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window

title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is

shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.

Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But

it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters

available also depends on the font used and other things in the title

bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,

values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.

'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.

'titleold'LINK

'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")

global

{not in Vi}

{only available when compiled with the +title

feature}

This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the

original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or

'titlestring' is not empty.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'titlestring'LINK

'titlestring' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +title

feature}

When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the

window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.

Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently

Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a

non-empty 't_ts' option).

When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will

be restored if possible X11.

When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be

expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.

Example:

:auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")

:set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70

The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right

of the available space.

Some people prefer to have the file name first:

:set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)

Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,

without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a

separating space only when needed.

NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display

to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).

{not available when compiled without the +statusline feature}

'toolbar' 'tb'LINK

'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")

global

{only for +GUI_GTK, +GUI_Athena, +GUI_Motif and

+GUI_Photon}

The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The

possible values are:

icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.

text Toolbar buttons shown with text.

horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are

horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}

tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.

Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse

cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.

If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the

following:

:set tb=icons,text

Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They

will show icons if both are requested.

If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if

'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable

the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example:

:set guioptions-=T

Also see gui-toolbar.

'toolbariconsize' 'tbis'LINK

'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")

global

{not in Vi}

{only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}

Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:

tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.

small Use small toolbar icons (default).

medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.

large Use large toolbar icons.

The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on

the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,

small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.

If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined

by user preferences or the current theme is used.

'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' 'nottybuiltin' 'notbi'LINK

'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.

When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.

When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for

the change to take effect, for example:

:set notbi term=$TERM

See also termcap.

Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin

termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty

xterm entries...).

'ttyfast' 'tf' 'nottyfast' 'notf'LINK

'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,

sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or

iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in

a DOS console)

global

{not in Vi}

Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to

the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line

commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple

windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.

Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen

line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the

mouse in an xterm and other terminals.

'ttymouse' 'ttym'LINK

'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')

global

{not in Vi}

{only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not

available when compiled without +mouse}

Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.

Currently these strings are valid:

xterm-mouseLINK

xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates

"<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:

"s" = button state

"c" = column plus 33

"r" = row plus 33

This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec",

"urxvt", and "sgr" for solutions.

xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the

mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works

much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at

least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to

work. See below for how Vim detects this

automatically.

netterm-mouseLINK

netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates

"<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers

for the row and column.

dec-mouseLINK

dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a

rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".

This is also available for an Xterm, if it was

configured with "--enable-dec-locator".

jsbterm-mouseLINK

jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.

pterm-mouseLINK

pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.

urxvt-mouseLINK

urxvt Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.

The mouse works only if the terminal supports this

encoding style, but it does not have 223 columns limit

unlike "xterm" or "xterm2".

sgr-mouseLINK

sgr Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled

mouse reporting. The mouse works even in columns

beyond 223. This option is backward compatible with

"xterm2" because it can also decode "xterm2" style

mouse codes.

The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time +mouse_xterm

+mouse_dec +mouse_netterm +mouse_jsbterm +mouse_urxvt

+mouse_sgr.

Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always

recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes

are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not

"xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict

with them).

This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is

set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", or "screen", and

'ttymouse' is not set already.

Additionally, if vim is compiled with the +termresponse feature and

t_RV is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version

number, more intelligent detection process runs.

The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be

from 95 to 276. The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is

277 or highter.

If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr"

automatically, set t_RV to an empty string:

:set t_RV=

'ttyscroll' 'tsl'LINK

'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)

global

Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines

to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is

very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,

e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.

'ttytype' 'tty'LINK

'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)

global

Alias for 'term', see above.

'undodir' 'udir'LINK

'undodir' 'udir' string (default ".")

global

{not in Vi}

{only when compiled with the +persistent_undo feature}

List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.

See 'backupdir' for details of the format.

"." means using the directory of the file. The undo file name for

"file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".

For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited

file, with path separators replaced with "%".

When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always

works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.

When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file. The first

undo file that exists is used. When it cannot be read an error is

given, no further entry is used.

See undo-persistence.

'undofile' 'noundofile' 'udf' 'noudf'LINK

'undofile' 'udf' boolean (default off)

local to buffer

{not in Vi}

{only when compiled with the +persistent_undo feature}

When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when

writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same

file on buffer read.

The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.

For more information about this feature see undo-persistence.

The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from

before a reload to be saved for undo.

When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.

'undolevels' 'ul'LINK

'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,

Win32 and OS/2)

global or local to buffer global-local

{not in Vi}

Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information

is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used

(nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).

Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes

itself:

set ul=0

But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in

'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.

Also see undo-two-ways.

Set to -1 for no undo at all. You might want to do this only for the

current buffer:

setlocal ul=-1

This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.

The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used.

Also see clear-undo.

'undoreload' 'ur'LINK

'undoreload' 'ur' number (default 10000)

global

{not in Vi}

Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it. This applies to the

":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of

Vim. FileChangedShell

The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number

of lines is smaller than the value of this option.

Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.

When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.

Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory. Set

this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.

'updatecount' 'uc'LINK

'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)

global

{not in Vi}

After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to

disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on

recovery crash-recovery). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting

Vim with the "-n" option, see startup. When editing in readonly

mode this option will be initialized to 10000.

The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with 'swapfile'.

When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are

created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'

is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.

Also see 'swapsync'.

This option has no meaning in buffers where 'buftype' is "nofile"

or "nowrite".

'updatetime' 'ut'LINK

'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)

global

{not in Vi}

If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be

written to disk (see crash-recovery). Also used for the

CursorHold autocommand event.

'verbose' 'vbs'LINK

'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean

verbose option}

When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.

Currently, these messages are given:

>= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.

>= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.

>= 5 Every searched tags file and include file.

>= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.

>= 9 Every executed autocommand.

>= 12 Every executed function.

>= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.

>= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.

>= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).

This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See -V.

This option is also set by the :verbose command.

When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not

displayed.

'verbosefile' 'vfile'LINK

'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty)

global

{not in Vi}

When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.

When the file exists messages are appended.

Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made

empty. Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.

Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.

The difference with :redir is that verbose messages are not

displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.

'viewdir' 'vdir'LINK

'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:

"$VIM/vimfiles/view",

for Unix: "~/.vim/view",

for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"

for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"

for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +mksession

feature}

Name of the directory where to store files for :mkview.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'viewoptions' 'vop'LINK

'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +mksession

feature}

Changes the effect of the :mkview command. It is a comma separated

list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:

word save and restore

cursor cursor position in file and in window

folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local

fold options

options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not

global values for local options)

localoptions same as "options"

slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward

slashes

unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when

on Windows or DOS

"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files

with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,

but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.

'viminfo' 'vi' E526 E527 E528LINK

'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,

Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,

for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:

for others: '100,<50,s10,h)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +viminfo

feature}

When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written

when exiting Vim (see viminfo-file). The string should be a comma

separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character

identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string

which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular

character is left out, then the default value is used for that

parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and

the effect of their value.

CHAR VALUE

viminfo-!LINK

! When included, save and restore global variables that start

with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase

letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"

and "_K_L_M" are not. Nested List and Dict items may not be

read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.

viminfo-quoteLINK

" Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of

the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a

backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the

start of a comment!

viminfo-%LINK

% When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is

started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not

restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the

buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers

without a file name and buffers for help files are not written

to the viminfo file.

When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum

number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all

buffers are stored.

viminfo-'LINK

' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks

are remembered. This parameter must always be included when

'viminfo' is non-empty.

Including this item also means that the jumplist and the

changelist are stored in the viminfo file.

viminfo-/LINK

/ Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be

saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute

patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of

'history' is used.

viminfo-:LINK

: Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be

saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.

viminfo-<LINK

< Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then

registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are

saved. '"' is the old name for this item.

Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.

viminfo-@LINK

@ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be

saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.

viminfo-cLINK

c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the

'encoding' used when writing the file to the current

'encoding'. See viminfo-encoding.

viminfo-fLINK

f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0

to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when

non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current

cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").

viminfo-hLINK

h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo

file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"

has been used since the last search command.

viminfo-nLINK

n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow

the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was

given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one

given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded

when opening the file, not when setting the option.

viminfo-rLINK

r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next

','). This parameter can be given several times. Each

specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be

stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you

could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can

also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is

ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50

characters.

viminfo-sLINK

s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are

not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default

"s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.

Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.

Example:

:set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo

'50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you

edited.

<1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be

remembered.

s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.

:0 Command-line history will not be saved.

n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".

no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,

that is, save all of the search history, and also the

previous search and substitute patterns.

no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.

no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.

When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use :rviminfo to

load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.

This option cannot be set from a modeline or in the sandbox, for

security reasons.

'virtualedit' 've'LINK

'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the

+virtualedit feature}

A comma separated list of these words:

block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.

insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.

all Allow virtual editing in all modes.

onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line

Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is

no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end

of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and

editing a table.

"onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just

after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more

consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line

if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also

break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because l can move

the cursor after the last character. Use with care!

Using the $ command will move to the last character in the line, not

past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left!

The g$ command will move to the end of the screen line.

It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will

not get a warning for it.

'visualbell' 'vb' 'novisualbell' 'novb' beepLINK

'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the

visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,

use ":set vb t_vb=".

Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You

might want to set it again in your gvimrc.

In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display

for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",

where 40 is the time in msec.

Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.

Also see 'errorbells'.

'warn' 'nowarn'LINK

'warn' boolean (default on)

global

Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer

has been changed.

'weirdinvert' 'wiv' 'noweirdinvert' 'nowiv'LINK

'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option.

It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.

Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and

vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.

'whichwrap' 'ww'LINK

'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")

global

{not in Vi}

Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the

previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in

the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:

char key mode

b <BS> Normal and Visual

s <Space> Normal and Visual

h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended)

l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended)

< <Left> Normal and Visual

> <Right> Normal and Visual

~ "~" Normal

[ <Left> Insert and Replace

] <Right> Insert and Replace

For example:

:set ww=<,>,[,]

allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.

When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change

operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"

different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This

is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and

"dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping

":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the

cursor.

When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a

line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl",

"yl" etc. work normally.

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'wildchar' 'wc'LINK

'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)

global

{not in Vi}

Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the

command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.

More info here: cmdline-completion.

The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See

'wildcharm' for that.

Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key:

:set wc=<Esc>

NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is

set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

'wildcharm' 'wcm'LINK

'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))

global

{not in Vi}

'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is

recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line

keys suitable for this option by looking at ex-edit-index. Normally

you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that

automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.:

:set wcm=<C-Z>

:cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>

Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.

'wildignore' 'wig'LINK

'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +wildignore

feature}

A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these

patterns is ignored when expanding wildcards, completing file or

directory names, and influences the result of expand(), glob() and

globpath() unless a flag is passed to disable this.

The pattern is used like with :autocmd, see autocmd-patterns.

Also see 'suffixes'.

Example:

:set wildignore=*.o,*.obj

The use of :set+= and :set-= is preferred when adding or removing

a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version

uses another default.

'wildignorecase' 'wic' 'nowildignorecase' 'nowic'LINK

'wildignorecase' 'wic' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.

Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set.

Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which

happens when there are special characters.

'wildmenu' 'wmnu' 'nowildmenu' 'nowmnu'LINK

'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available if compiled without the +wildmenu

feature}

When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced

mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,

the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the

first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is

one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or

CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.

When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is

specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.

You can check the current mode with wildmenumode().

If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on

the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls

as needed.

The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used

for selecting a completion.

While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special

meanings:

<Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)

<Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a

subdirectory or submenu.

<CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a

dot: move into a submenu.

<Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into

parent directory or parent menu.

This makes the menus accessible from the console console-menus.

If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead

of selecting a different match, use this:

:cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>

:cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>

The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match

hl-WildMenu.

'wildmode' 'wim'LINK

'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")

global

{not in Vi}

Completion mode that is used for the character specified with

'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each

part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The

first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',

The second part for the second use, etc.

These are the possible values for each part:

"" Complete only the first match.

"full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,

the original string is used and then the first match

again.

"longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't

result in a longer string, use the next part.

"longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is

enabled.

"list" When more than one match, list all matches.

"list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and

complete first match.

"list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and

complete till longest common string.

When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.

Examples:

:set wildmode=full

Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default)

:set wildmode=longest,full

Complete longest common string, then each full match

:set wildmode=list:full

List all matches and complete each full match

:set wildmode=list,full

List all matches without completing, then each full match

:set wildmode=longest,list

Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.

More info here: cmdline-completion.

'wildoptions' 'wop'LINK

'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "")

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +wildignore

feature}

A list of words that change how command line completion is done.

Currently only one word is allowed:

tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of

tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match

is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are:

d #define

f function

Also see cmdline-completion.

'winaltkeys' 'wak'LINK

'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")

global

{not in Vi}

{only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}

Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT

key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the

menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and

entering special characters. This option tells what to do:

no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be

mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be

done with the :simalt command.

yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key

combinations cannot be mapped.

menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu

shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other

keys can be mapped.

If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT

key is never used for the menu.

This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will

select the menu, unless it has been mapped.

'window' 'wi'LINK

'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1)

global

Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window,

use 'lines' for that.

Used for CTRL-F and CTRL-B when there is only one window and the

value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll

'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.

When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll

in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.

When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than

or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.

{Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines}

'winheight' 'wh' E591LINK

'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard

minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the

focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the

cost of the height of other windows.

Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.

Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.

Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback

that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"

to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,

using the VimEnter event:

au VimEnter * set winheight=999

Minimum value is 1.

The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the

height of the current window.

'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set

the minimal height for other windows.

'winfixheight' 'wfh' 'nowinfixheight' 'nowfh'LINK

'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and

'equalalways' is set. Also for CTRL-W_=. Set by default for the

preview-window and quickfix-window.

The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.

'winfixwidth' 'wfw' 'nowinfixwidth' 'nowfw'LINK

'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off)

local to window

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and

'equalalways' is set. Also for CTRL-W_=.

The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.

'winminheight' 'wmh'LINK

'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +windows

feature}

The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.

This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.

When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a

status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when

they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)

Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.

This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a

large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few

windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.

'winminwidth' 'wmw'LINK

'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.

This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.

When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just

a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one

line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere

to go.)

Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.

This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a

large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few

windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.

'winwidth' 'wiw' E592LINK

'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)

global

{not in Vi}

{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit

feature}

Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard

minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If

the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of

the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window

always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.

The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the

width of the current window.

'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set

the minimal width for other windows.

'wrap' 'nowrap'LINK

'wrap' boolean (default on)

local to window

{not in Vi}

This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text

in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.

When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and

displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap

and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is

moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll

horizontally.

The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See

'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.

To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this:

:set sidescroll=5

:set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>

See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and wrap-off.

This option can't be set from a modeline when the 'diff' option is

on.

'wrapmargin' 'wm'LINK

'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)

local to buffer

Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping

starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted

and inserting continues on the next line.

Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause

the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible.

When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.

See also 'formatoptions' and ins-textwidth. {Vi: works differently

and less usefully}

'wrapscan' 'ws' 'nowrapscan' 'nows'LINK

'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) E384 E385LINK

global

Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to ]s and

[s, searching for spelling mistakes.

'write' 'nowrite'LINK

'write' boolean (default on)

global

{not in Vi}

Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.

Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are

still allowed. Can be reset with the -m or -M command line

argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires

writing a temporary file.

'writeany' 'wa' 'nowriteany' 'nowa'LINK

'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)

global

Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.

'writebackup' 'wb' 'nowritebackup' 'nowb'LINK

'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with +writebackup feature, off

otherwise)

global

{not in Vi}

Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after

the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is

also on.

WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write

your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you

lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only reset

this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write

fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).

See backup-table for another explanation.

When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.

NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is

set.

'writedelay' 'wd'LINK

'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)

global

{not in Vi}

The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the

screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by

one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.

vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: